4. 大双品复注巴利 4. Mahāyamakavaggo
222 段
《小牛角经》的注释巴利
1. Cūḷagosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
325 325. 亲戚们居住的村落叫“亲戚村”(ñātiko),也就是“那提迦”(nātiko)。据说那个村落是属于某些人的,他们的祖先为了让自己的亲戚共同拥有而建立了它,因此就被称为“那提迦”。后来,那个村落被两位继承人分成两份来使用。所以经中说“两个小父大父之子的两个村落”。giñjakā 就是砖,完全用砖建成的住处就是“砖舍”(giñjakāvasatho)。据说那个地方的泥土不含石子、砂砾、瓦砾等杂质,不粗糙,细腻柔软;用那种泥土做的陶器也像石头做的一样坚固。因此,那些近事男用那种泥土做成又长又厚的砖,除了门框、窗框、门扇、横梁之外,其余全部不用木材等材料,纯粹用砖建成了殿堂。所以经中说“仅用砖”等等。巴利
325. Ñātīnaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.19) nivāsaṭṭhānabhūto gāmo ñātiko, so eva nātiko. So kira gāmo yesaṃ santako, tesaṃ pubbapurisena attano ñātīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvena nivesito, tena ‘‘nātiko’’ti paññāyittha. Atha pacchā tattha dvīhi dāyādehi dvidhā vibhajitvā paribhutto. Tenāha ‘‘dvinnaṃ cūḷapitimahāpitiputtānaṃ dve gāmā’’ti. Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhiyeva kato āvasatho giñjakāvasatho. Tasmiṃ kira padese mattikā sakkharamarumbavālikādīhi asammissā akaṭhinā saṇhā sukhumā, tāya katāni kulālabhājanānipi silāmayāni viya daḷhāni, tasmā te upāsakā tāya mattikāya dīghaputhulaiṭṭhakā kāretvā tāhi ṭhapetvā dvārabāhavātapānakavāṭatulāyo sesaṃ sabbaṃ dabbasambhārena vinā iṭṭhakāhi eva pāsādaṃ kāresuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iṭṭhakāhevā’’tiādi.
“牛角娑罗林园”是指那片名叫“牛角娑罗林”的受保护森林。“最上树”是指那片林中作为林主的沙罗树。“和合味”是指和合等功德,也就是远离之乐。在《上分五十》的《随烦恼经》(《中部》3.237-238)里,说的是凡夫阶段的情形;而这里《小牛角经》说的则是漏尽者的阶段。那些大长老虽然已经完成了应做的事,但他们看到现法乐住对自己有益,也看到后人会随学效仿,于是进一步修习更殊胜的远离,体验着和合之味,安住于那里。“那时”是指开示《随烦恼经》的时候。“他们”是指以阿那律为首的那些善男子。“已得滋味”是指通过观修之道而获得的滋味。因为观持续生起时,会带来前后越来越殊胜的差别,并带来格外强烈的喜与悦。因此世尊说:巴利
Gosiṅgasālavanadāyanti gosiṅgasālavananti laddhanāmaṃ rakkhitaṃ araññaṃ. Jeṭṭhakarukkhassāti vanappatibhūtassa sālarukkhassa. Sāmaggirasanti samaggabhāvādiguṇaṃ vivekasukhaṃ. Uparipaṇṇāsake upakkilesasutte (ma. ni. 3.237-238) puthujjanakālo kathito, idha cūḷagosiṅgasutte khīṇāsavakālo kathito. Katakiccāpi hi te mahātherā attano diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanañca sampassantā paramañca vivekaṃ anubrūhantā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā tattha viharanti. Tadāti tasmiṃ upakkilesasuttadesanākāle. Teti anuruddhappamukhā kulaputtā. Laddhassādāti vipassanāya vīthipaṭipattiyā adhigatassādā. Vipassanā hi pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantī pavattamānā sātisayaṃ pītisomanassaṃ āvahati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“ 每当如实观照诸蕴的生起与坏灭,
获得喜悦和欢欣,那是知者的不死。”巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhati pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
通过证得道果而获得立足。因为确实在证得道果时,才称为在教法中获得了立足,否则不然。巴利
Laddhapatiṭṭhā maggaphalādhigamanena. Sati hi maggaphalādhigame sāsane patiṭṭhā laddhā nāma hoti, no aññathā.
当然,舍利弗和目犍连也属于大弟子之列,但为了显示他们作为上首弟子的特殊地位,才单独列出“法将、大目犍连长老”等。因为即使在同一类中,有特殊之处的人也会被单独提及,比如“婆罗门们来了,婆私吒也来了”。不过,即使把他们单独列出,说“八十位大弟子”时,八十这个数字也不会因为少了或多了几个而影响计算。所谓“至少”,是就他作为法库侍者、因亲近而常随左右而言。“军”指象军,从象军到象群,就是这个意思。黑狮子多半成群而行,所以说“如离群的黑狮子”;而鬃狮子则是独行的。如被风吹散的云,就像被风撕开、有山顶那么大的云片。为了提振他们:就像饥饿的人对食物、口渴的人对水、受冷的人对暖、受热的人对凉、受苦的人对乐会生起欢喜一样;同样,世尊看见憍赏弥的比丘们互相争执,又看到另一些比丘和合而住,这时这三位善男子出现在他心中,于是他想提振他们,便走近他们。这样,通过这一修行次第,就成了调伏憍赏弥比丘们的方法。因此说“为了提振他们”。应当看到,这里也部分说明了“哀愍后来的人”这个理由。赞叹之后:就是用如实赞叹他们的功德来使他们殊胜、使他们超胜,这是以称赞的方式重复说的话。巴利
Kāmaṃ sāriputtamoggallānāpi mahāsāvakapariyāpannāva, aggasāvakabhāvena pana nesaṃ visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānattheresu vā’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Satipi hi sāmaññayoge visesavanto visuṃ gayhanti yathā ‘‘brāhmaṇā āgatā, vāsiṭṭhopi āgato’’ti. Tesu pana visuṃ gahitesupi ‘‘asītimahāsāvakesū’’ti asītiggahaṇaṃ appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanupagaṃ na hotīti. Antamasoti idaṃ dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa upaṭṭhākabhāvena āsannacāritāya vuttaṃ. Anīkāti hatthānīkā, hatthānīkato hatthisamūhatoti attho. Kāḷasīho yebhuyyena yūthacaroti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘yūthā nissaṭo kāḷasīho viyā’’ti. Kesarī pana ekacarova. Vātacchinno valāhako viyāti vātacchinno pabbatakūṭappamāṇo valāhakacchedo viya. Tesaṃ paggaṇhanatoti yathā nāma jighacchitassa bhojane, pipāsitassa pānīye, sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhe, uṇhena phuṭṭhassa sīte, dukkhitassa sukhe abhiruci uppajjati, evamevaṃ bhagavato kosambake bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ vivādāpanne disvā apare samaggāvāsaṃ vasante āvajjitassa ime tayo kulaputtā āpāthaṃ āgamiṃsu, atha ne paggaṇhitukāmo upasaṅkami, evāyaṃ paṭipattianukkamena kosambakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayanupāyo hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ paggaṇhanato’’ti. Eteneva pacchimajanataṃ anukampanatoti idampi kāraṇaṃ ekadesena saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ukkaṃsitvāti yathābhūtehi guṇehi sampahaṃsanena visesetvā visiṭṭhe katvā pasaṃsāvasena cetaṃ āmeḍitavacanaṃ.
他受森林主人之命守护这片树林。这片受到守护、保护的林丛,并不像大森林等那样无人管束。为了自身的利益——也就是持戒等种种修行——而精勤修行的人,是爱惜自己的人,并不是那种尚未舍弃贪爱之情的人,所以说“求自己利益的人”。因此说“若有人……”等等。“破坏”就是毁灭的意思。巴利
Taṃ araññaṃ rakkhati vanasāminā āṇatto. Rakkhitagopitaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ, na mahāvanādi viya apariggahitaṃ. Sīlādippabhedāya attatthāya paṭipannā attakāmā, na apariccattasinehāti āha ‘‘attano hitaṃ kāmayamānā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Bhindeyyāti vināseyya.
智慧薄弱的人,就是指智慧虚弱、没有见识的人。那些,是指在出身等方面出现的神变。用袈裟内室隐藏起来之后,意思是像藏进叫做袈裟的小室里一样。仅仅披着袈裟,并不能遮住佛陀的威力。不过,世尊以那样的神通变化把它遮盖起来才离开,心里想的是“不要让任何人知道这佛陀的威力”,所以经文才那样说。因此说,他以不为人知的模样去了。巴利
Dubbalamanussāti paññāya dubbalā aviddasuno manussā. Tānīti abhijātiādīsu uppannapāṭihāriyāni. Cīvaragabbhena paṭicchādetvāti cīvarasaṅkhāte ovarake nigūhitvā viya. Na hi cīvarapārupanamattena buddhānubhāvo paṭicchanno hoti. ‘‘Mā sudha kocimaṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ aññāsī’’ti pana tathārūpena iddhābhisaṅkhārena taṃ chādetvā gato bhagavā tathā vutto. Tenāha ‘‘aññātakavesena agamāsī’’ti.
“Abhikkamatha”(请过来)这个词,是以面向对方、合乎法度的方式说的,所以注释说“从这边过来吧”。诸佛的身体就像极为纯净的宝石一样庄严,没有任何污垢需要去除,那世尊为什么还要洗脚呢?为了说明这一点,接着就说“诸佛……”等等。巴利
Abhikkamathāti padaṃ abhimukhabhāvena vidhimukhena vadatīti āha ‘‘ito āgacchathā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ kāyo nāma suvisuddhajātimaṇi viya sobhano, kiñci malaṃ apanetabbaṃ natthi, kimatthaṃ bhagavā pāde pakkhālesīti āha ‘‘buddhāna’’ntiādi.
326 阿那律们:这是用单数代替复数的省略说法,因为也想涵盖“除阿那律以外其他诸人”这种省略表达;这样处理之后,用复数来表述也就说得通了。威仪堪忍:因为身体轻快,所以四种威仪都能安乐地运行。维持生命:具有维持特性的命根,维系着这副身体机器,让它安乐地运转。一勺粥或一匙乞食:这是按照摩伽罗注释的方式,指靠混合食物来维持生命而说的。因此注释中说“这是在询问乞食的行法”。巴利
326.Anuruddhāti vā ekasesanayena vuttaṃ virūpekasesassapi icchitabbattā, evañca katvā bahuvacananiddesopi samatthito hoti. Iriyāpatho khamatīti sarīrassa lahuṭṭhānatāya catubbidhopi iriyāpatho sukhappavattiko. Jīvitaṃ yāpetīti yāpanālakkhaṇaṃ jīvitaṃ imaṃ sarīrayantaṃ yāpeti sukhena pavatteti. Uḷuṅkayāguṃ vā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ vāti idaṃ makaravuttiyā missakabhattena yāpanaṃ vattanti katvā vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhikkhācāravattaṃ pucchatī’’ti.
“相互融合”:虽然这两堆东西从究竟真实来说是有差别的,但在多数人看来,它们之间的差别很难分辨,就像乳汁和水混在一起那样,完全融为一体地存在着。因此说“没有分开,仿佛成了同一体”。展现出可爱样貌的眼睛,就是“慈眼”。“可爱”:被人喜爱,或者值得被喜爱,就是“可爱”。世尊为了询问他们和合共住的根本原因,而说了“那么,是怎样呢?”等话,所以注释里说“‘怎样’是对原因的询问”。也就是说,是在问他们之间那种充满慈爱的身业等,是如何在彼此面前表现出来的。正如下文中长老们回答“尊者,我们是这样……”那样。巴利
Aññamaññaṃ saṃsandatīti satipi ubhayesaṃ kalāpānaṃ paramatthato bhede pacurajanehi duviññeyyanānattaṃ khīrodakasammoditaṃ accantameva saṃsaṭṭhaṃ viya hutvā tiṭṭhati. Tenāha ‘‘visuṃ na hoti, ekattaṃ viya upetī’’ti. Piyabhāvadīpanāni cakkhūni piyacakkhūni. Piyāyati, piyāyitabboti vā piyoti. Samaggavāsassa yaṃ ekantakāraṇaṃ, taṃ pucchanto bhagavā ‘‘yathā kathaṃ panā’’tiādimāhāti ‘‘kathanti kāraṇapucchā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo nesaṃ mettāsahitānaṃyeva kammādīnaṃ aññamaññasmiṃ paccupaṭṭhānākāro, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘katha’’nti pucchā. Tathā hi parato ‘‘evaṃ kho mayaṃ, bhante’’tiādinā therehi vissajjanaṃ kathitaṃ.
对某人有慈的身业,就叫“有慈”。当面做就是公开,背后做就是不公开。如果是为了某个人而生起慈的身业,当着那人的面做,就是公开的;背着那人做,就是不公开的。所以说“公开和隐秘,就是当面和背后”。“其他的”指的是背后的身业和语业。为了把“在那里”等话里简略说过的意思展开来讲,才说了“也就是……”这些内容。按扫地等方式,照料应当维护的地方。“同样地”是说,就像当面做慈的身业那样。像“您还好吗,能忍受吗?”这类话,是寒暄语。为了彼此融洽、以款待的方式说的话,是款待语。像“啊,那时候长老给了我这样的教诫,给了我这样的教导”这样,值得日后回忆的话,或者与六和合相关的谈论,是忆念语。放下经文原文,转而解释其含义、谈论戒等法义的话,是法语。用音调诵出经文,是声诵。为了弄懂想知道的义理而发问,是提问。对所问的内容加以解答,是回答问题。“如此作意”的意思是:这样作意,这样把慈心施予对方。巴利
Mittaṃ etassa atthīti mettaṃ, kāyakammaṃ. Āvīti pakāsaṃ. Rahoti appakāsaṃ. Yañhi uddissa mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ paccupaṭṭhapeti, taṃ tassa sammukhā ce, pakāsaṃ hoti, parammukhā ce, appakāsaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ceva parammukhā cā’’ti. Itarānīti parammukhā kāyavacīkammāni. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammajjanādivasena paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ ṭhānaṃ vā. Tathevāti yathā sammukhā kate mettākāyakamme vuttaṃ, tatheva . ‘‘Kacci khamanīya’’nti evamādikā kathā sammodanīyakathā. Yathā parehi saddhiṃ attano chiddaṃ na hoti, tathā paṭisanthāravasena pavattā kathā paṭisanthārakathā. ‘‘Aho tadā therena mayhaṃ dinno ovādo, dinnā anusāsanī’’ti evaṃ kālantare saritabbayuttā, chasāraṇīyapaṭisaṃyuttā vā kathā sāraṇīyakathā. Suttapadaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa atthaniddesavasena sīlādidhammapaṭisaṃyuttā kathā dhammīkathā. Sarena suttassa uccāraṇaṃ sarabhaññaṃ. Pañhassa ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pucchanaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ. Tassa yathāpucchitassaādisanaṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ. Evaṃ samannāharatoti evaṃ manasikaroto, evaṃ mettaṃ upasaṃharatoti attho.
没法把它们合成一个,所以说是各别的。以利益为义,是说像对待自己一样,彼此怀有利益之心。以无间为义,是说中间没有空隙、没有分裂。以无诤为义,是说没有对立冲突。以和合为义,是说彼此融洽相处。涂地,是用厚薄不一的泥浆涂抹。洗衣,是洗自己的袈裟。或涂地,是为自己的叶屋涂抹地面。巴利
Ekato kātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā nānā. Hitaṭṭhenāti attano viya aññamaññassa hitabhāvena. Nirantaraṭṭhenāti antarābhāvena bhedābhāvena. Aviggahaṭṭhenāti avirodhabhāvena. Samaggaṭṭhenāti sahitabhāvena. Paribhaṇḍaṃ katvāti bahalatanumattikālepehi limpetvā. Cīvaraṃ vā dhovantīti attano cīvaraṃ vā dhovanti. Paribhaṇḍaṃ vāti attano paṇṇasālāya paribhaṇḍaṃ vā karonti.
327 “正是相违”这里也要把“大多数”这个词带进来,连起来理解。他们的不放逸相,就是他们不放逸的本性。“阿那律们,你们是否和合”这里,vo只是个语气助词,或者是表示各自的说法,应当理解为“你们”。“突然落下的钵”,是指像从匣子里骤然掉出来的钵。巴利
327.Paṭiviruddhā evāti etthāpi ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesaṃ appamādalakkhaṇanti tesaṃ appamajjanasabhāvaṃ. Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggāti etthāpi voti nipātamattaṃ, paccattavacanaṃ vā, kacci tumheti evamattho veditabbo. Samuggapātinti samuggapuṭasadisaṃ pātiṃ.
在叶屋里,把里面和外面都打扫干净,使地面整洁,这是应尽的义务。只取维持自己生命所需的那一份。“放入”就是“投进钵里”。只取一定的量,就是只取维持自己生命所需的量。按所说的方式舍弃,就是按照经中所说的方式舍弃。巴利
Paṇṇasālāyaṃ anto bahi ca sammajjanena sodhitaṅgaṇatā vattapaṭipatti. Paṭivisamattamevāti attano yāpanapaṭivisamattameva. Osāpetvāti pakkhipitvā. Pamāṇamevāti attano yāpanapamāṇameva. Vuttanayena jahitvāti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanayena jahitvā.
用手握住另一只手,紧紧抓牢,这就是“手与手互相交织”。能跨越,意思是凭这个能到达别的地方,所以叫跨越者,也就是手。手本身就是跨越者,所以叫手跨越者,也就是用这个手跨越者。巴利
Hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbantāti attano hatthena itarassa hatthaṃ daḷhaggahaṇavasena bandhantā. Vilaṅgheti desantaraṃ pāpeti etenāti vilaṅghako, hattho. Hattho eva vilaṅghako hatthavilaṅghako, tena hatthavilaṅghakena.
把它做成不残缺的:是指在三天里都让听法持续进行,使它不中断。“此”是指“每隔五日”等说法。每第五天举行,所以叫“五日一次”。这是世尊问阿那律长老时,长老回答的。“只在放逸之处”:是指只在别人放逸的地方。为了把“只在放逸之处”这个意思说得更清楚,才接着说“对别人来说……”等话。“产生戏论之处”:是说话戏论产生的地方,也就是因为展开散漫闲谈而在业处上放逸的地方。在那里,长老也显示了自己已达顶点的不放逸之相,说:“尊者,我们不从事与业处相违的事。”而“除了这段时间以外”这句话,是因为那时他们没有受用住定等至而说的。巴利
Taṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti taṃ tīsupi divasesu dhammassavanaṃ pavattanavasena akhaṇḍikaṃ katvā. Etanti ‘‘pañcāhikaṃ kho panā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Pañcame pañcame ahani bhavatīti pañcāhikaṃ. Bhagavatā pucchitena anuruddhattherena. Pamādaṭṭhānesuyevāti aññesaṃ pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva. ‘‘Pamādaṭṭhānesuyevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘aññesañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Papañcakaraṇaṭṭhānānīti kathāpapañcassa karaṇaṭṭhānāni vissaṭṭhakathāpavattanena kammaṭṭhāne pamajjanaṭṭhānāni. Tatthāpi ‘‘mayaṃ, bhante, kammaṭṭhānaviruddhaṃ na paṭipajjāmā’’ti sikhāppattaṃ attano appamādalakkhaṇaṃ thero dasseti. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ muñcitvāti pana idaṃ tadā vihārasamāpattīnaṃ vaḷañjābhāvena vuttaṃ.
328 328. 因为这是就禅那而说的,所以才说“圣知见的殊胜”。长老自己行道端正,为了让大师心生欢喜,又因为这种殊胜的证悟在大师面前是现前可见的,所以长老说:“尊者,我们怎么会没有呢?” “Yāvadeva”是“只要”的意思,指那么一段时间:或者一日中的某一段,或者一整夜,乃至七天。巴利
328. Jhānassa adhippetattā ‘‘alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso’’icceva vuttaṃ. Attano sammāpaṭipannatāya satthu cittārādhanatthaṃ tassa ca visesādhigamassa satthu paccakkhabhāvato thero ‘‘kiñhi no siyā, bhante’’ti āha. Yāvadevāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ ekaṃ divasabhāgaṃ vā sakalarattiṃ vā yāva satta vā divase.
329 “彻底超越”就是正确地完全超越。因为当更高的殊胜证得时,下面的禅那才被称为已超越、已止息。因此说“为了止息”。要知道,“智见殊胜”是借原因来代称的说法。“有受之乐”是指与感受相应的禅那之乐,或者果报之乐。“无受之乐”则像涅槃之乐一样,是没有感受的乐。而且“无受之乐”只是一种比喻性的说明,实际上它是无触、无想、无心的,完全没有任何心与心所。虽然那时色法仍在运作,但因为无心,彻底远离了一切行苦,所以灭尽定被称为更寂静、更殊胜。因此说:“无受之乐是更寂静、更殊胜的。”由此又说“从此”等。巴利
329.Samatikkamāyāti sammadeva atikkamanāya. Sati hi upari visesādhigame heṭṭhimajjhānaṃ samatikkantaṃ nāma hoti paṭippassaddhi ca. Tenāha ‘‘paṭippassaddhiyā’’ti. Ñāṇadassanavisesoti kāraṇūpacārena vuttoti veditabbo. Vedayitasukhatoti vedanāsahitajjhānasukhato vā phalasukhato vā. Avedayitasukhanti nibbānasukhaṃ viya vedanārahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Avedayitasukhanti ca nidassanamattametaṃ, taṃ pana aphassaṃ asaññaṃ acetananti sabbacittacetasikarahitameva. Tato ca satipi rūpadhammappavattiyaṃ tassa acetanattā sabbaso saṅkhāradukkhavirahitatāya santatarā paṇītatarā ca nirodhasamāpattīti vuccate. Tenāha ‘‘avedayitasukhaṃ santataraṃ paṇītataraṃ hotī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imamhā cā’’tiādi.
330 世尊对他们说的,正是和合的利益与安乐,因为这话正合他们的意乐。“告知”的意思是,以不靠近的方式,正确地让他们知道。也有版本写作“anusaṃsāvetvā”,意思一样。“从那里返回”是说:他们明白世尊现在喜欢独处,领会了大师的心意,就从“你们就留在这里”这个告别的地方返回。“出家等”中的“等”字,包括了达上、清净、头陀行、修习业处、禅那、解脱、等至、如实知见、修道、证果等。“虽已证得”中的“pi”字,表示连那些已经证得的也算在内。对于“厌嫌述说自己的功德”,整句的意思是:依靠世尊而证得之后,在有关法的事务上,为了不让大师感到疲倦,对述说世尊显而易见的功德也感到厌嫌。“诸天神”指获得各种等至的天神。“我口被锁住”,意思是我的口有能力言说,适于言说。巴利
330.Sāmaggirasānisaṃsameva nesaṃ bhagavā kathesi ajjhāsayānukūlattā tassa. Anusāvetvāti anupagamanavasena sammadeva ārocetvā. ‘‘Anusaṃsāvetvā’’ti vā pāṭho, so evattho. Tato paṭinivattitvāti etarahi bhagavato ekavihāre ajjhāsayoti satthu manaṃ gaṇhantā ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhathā’’ti vissajjitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā . Pabbajjādīnīti ādi-saddena upasampadā-visuddhi-dhutakammaṭṭhānānuyoga-jhānavimokkha-samāpatti-ñāṇadassana-maggabhāvanā-phalasacchikiriyādike saṅgaṇhāti. Adhigantvāpīti pi-saddena yathādhigatānampi. Attano guṇakathāya aṭṭiyamānāti bhagavantaṃ nissāya adhigantvāpi dhammādhikaraṇaṃ satthuvihesābhāvadīpane bhagavato pākaṭaguṇānaṃ kathāya aṭṭiyamānāpīti yojanā. Devatāti taṃtaṃsamāpattilābhiniyo devatā. Mukhaṃ me sajjanti mukhaṃ me kathane samatthaṃ, kathane yogyanti attho.
331 “这样来的”,是指在《阿塔那帝亚经》中那样来到。“缠住”,是指催逼的时候。“悭吝”,是指她们受不了把自己的功德甚至讲给世尊听,于是心生悭吝,他是这样想的,所以才这么说。巴利
331.Evaṃ āgatoti evaṃ āṭānāṭiyasutte āgato. Paliveṭhenteti codente. Maccharāyantīti attano guṇānaṃ bhagavatopi ārocanaṃ asahamānā maccharāyantīti so cintetīti katvā vuttaṃ.
01 他们的利得:是指那些跋耆王和跋耆国住民得到人身、住在合适的地方等,以及三位善男子见到世尊、礼敬、布施、听法等这些利得。应当理解为“善得的利得”。应当忆念净信之心:是指对那个家族在戒等功德上生起净信之后,再加以忆念。正如所说:“诸比丘,我说对这些比丘的忆念,也有很大的利益。”巴利
01Tesaṃlābhāti tesaṃ vajjirājūnaṃ vajjiraṭṭhavāsīnañca manussattaṃ, patirūpadesavāsādiko, bhagavato tiṇṇañca kulaputtānaṃ dassanavandanadānadhammassavanādayo lābhā. Suladdhā lābhāti yojanā. Pasannacittaṃ anussareyyāti taṃ kulañhetaṃ sīlādiguṇe cittaṃ pasādetvā anussareyya. Vuttaṃ tesaṃ ‘‘anussaraṇampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahūpakāraṃ vadāmī’’ti (itivu. 104; saṃ. ni. 5.184).
2. 《大牛角经》的注释巴利
2. Mahāgosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
332 “不管哪一个”是指:在牛角娑罗林附近住着的人当中,无论哪个村庄会成为托钵的村落,由于它并不固定,所以没有指定托钵村,只是说明了居住的地方;正因如此,这部经才叫作以阿兰若为因缘。“一切处”:指天界和人界。“由行持坚固者”:指在教法中行持坚固、使之稳固的人。“因听闻究竟而生”:意思是听闻含摄四圣谛的佛法,到了听闻的终点,便以圣洁的诞生而生。声闻弟子正是通过听闻佛法,才成就了证悟与多闻。就像太阳以光辉功德之光,能消除愚痴的黑暗;就像月亮以可爱、悦意、清凉的功德,能止息烦恼的热恼;就像大海以深、广、稳固、无量等种种功德,而安住于法的自性;由于功德广大,这位长老才广为人知,而功德广大应当依据经中所述的方式来了知。为了详细说明这一点,才说了“不仅……”等语。《狮子吼经》:指中部中收录的《大狮子吼经》(中部1.146)。《长老所问经》:指《经集》中《八颂品》所收录的《舍利弗经》(经集961-981)。《长老狮子吼经》:指这位长老在游行诸国时,在导师面前所说的狮子吼经。《出家》:指这位长老舍弃在家生活,连同庞大的亲属眷属和庞大的财产一起出家。此后的诸项也依此例可知。“即”:是虚词,意思是“凡此”。巴利
332.Kocidevāti gosiṅgasālavanasāmantato niviṭṭhesu yo koci gāmo gocaragāmo bhavissati, tasmā anibaddhabhāvato gocaragāmo na gahito, vasanaṭṭhānameva paridīpitaṃ, tato eva araññanidānakaṃ nāmetaṃ. Sabbatthāti devaloke manussaloke ca. Thirakārakehīti sāsane thirabhāvakārakehi. Savanante jātattāti catusaccagabbhassa dhammassavanassa pariyosāne ariyāya jātiyā jātattā. Yathā paṭivedhabāhusaccaṃ ijjhati, tathā dhammassa savanato sāvakā . Sūriyo viya bhāsuraguṇaraṃsitāya mohandhakāravidhamanato. Cando viya ramaṇīyamanoharasītalaguṇatāya kilesapariḷāhavūpasamato. Sāgaro viya gambhīrathiravipulānekaguṇatāya ṭhitadhammasabhāvato. Guṇamahantatāya therassa abhiññātatā, guṇamahantatā ca suttesu āgatanayeneva ñātabbāti taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sīhanādasuttanti majjhimanikāye āgataṃ mahāsīhanādasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 1.146). Therapañhasuttanti suttanipāte aṭṭhakavagge āgataṃ sāriputtasuttaṃ (su. ni. 961-981). Therasīhanādasuttanti imassa ca therassa janapadacārikāya satthu sammukhā sīhanādasuttaṃ. Abhinikkhamananti therasseva mahatā ñātiparivaṭṭena mahatā ca bhogaparivaṭṭena saha gharāvāsapariccāgo abhinikkhamanaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Yadidanti nipāto, yo ayanti attho.
带着大智慧的比丘们:据说,尊者舍利弗长老身边的随从比丘们,也全都是大智慧的人。因为众生本来就是按界性而聚集在一起的。至于自身具备神通等等,也是同样的道理。而这个含义应当由《界相应经》来说明:那时世尊在灵鹫山,卧在病榻上,舍利弗、目犍连等人为守护世尊而围绕安住;世尊看着他们各自带着自己的随众在经行,于是把比丘们叫来,说:比丘们,你们看见舍利弗和许多比丘一起经行吗?是的,尊者。比丘们,所有这些比丘都是大智慧的人。这一段应当详细展开。巴利
Mahāpaññe bhikkhū gahetvāti āyasmato kira sāriputtattherassa parivārabhikkhūpi mahāpaññā eva ahesuṃ. Dhātuso hi sattā saṃsandanti. Sayaṃ iddhimātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panattho dhātusaṃyuttena (saṃ. ni. 2.99) dīpetabbo – gijjhakūṭapabbate gilānaseyyāya nisinno bhagavā ārakkhatthāya parivāretvā vasantesu sāriputtamoggallānādīsu ekamekaṃ attano parisāya saddhiṃ caṅkamantaṃ voloketvā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘passatha no tumhe, bhikkhave, sāriputtaṃ sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ caṅkamantanti. Evaṃ, bhante. Sabbe kho ete, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mahāpaññā’’ti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
“林边”是指靠近树林的边缘。“如云色”是指深蓝色。这是就他像从大海深处涌出一般前来侍立的情景而说的。所谓“东方铁围山顶”,是就光明遍满的状态来说的,就像在铁围山顶附近那样,并不是说月亮真的在铁围山顶上运行。如果真是那样,日月的光明就会照到世界之间的地狱里去了。因为日月是依高度在轮围山的中间运行的。由于娑罗花的光辉极其红艳,所以说“像被虫胶汁浇灌一样”。“像在近前歌唱一样”:意思是像为了亲近侍奉而走上前去歌唱一样。他心里想:今天到底是为了禅那等至的快乐呢,还是为了谈论佛法的快乐,或是为了说法的快乐?巴利
Vananteti upavanante. Meghavaṇṇāyāti nīlābhāya. Samuddakucchito uggacchantassa viya upaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cakkavāḷapabbatamatthakasamīpe ābhāpharaṇavasena pavattiyā ‘‘pācīnacakkavāḷapabbatamatthake’’ti vuttaṃ, na cakkavāḷapabbatamatthake candamaṇḍalassa vicaraṇato. Tathā sati lokantarikanirayesupi candimasūriyānaṃ ābhā phareyya. Ubbedhavasena hi cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhato candimasūriyā vicaranti. Sālakusumapabhānaṃ atirattatāya vuttaṃ ‘‘lākhārasena siñcamānaṃ viyā’’ti. Upagāyamānā viyāti payirupāsanavasena upecca gāyamānā viya . Kāya nu kho ajja ratiyāti ajja jhānasamāpattiratiyā eva nu kho, udāhu dhammasākacchāratiyā dhammadesanāratiyāti cintesi.
就像两轮明月,达到了极致的美妙与光彩;就像两轮太阳,具有极其清净明亮的光辉功德;就像两头六牙象王,具有大威神力;就像两头狮子,具足威猛之势;就像两只老虎,行为勇健不退。一切全都盛开:也就是所有花朵都向四周完全绽放。巴利
Dve candamaṇḍalāni viya paramasobhaggappattāya kantiyā. Dve sūriyamaṇḍalāni viya ativiya suvisuddhasamujjalāya guṇavibhūtiyā. Dve chaddantanāgarājāno viya mahānubhāvatāya. Dve sīhā viya tejussadatāya. Dve byagghā viya anolīnavuttitāya. Sabbapāliphullamevāti sabbameva samantato vikasitaṃ.
333 333. “言语所行处”:言语在这里活动、进行,所以叫言语所行处,也就是听闻活动发生的地方。“rāmaṇeyyakaṃ”就是“ramaṇīyameva”,即极其悦意。“Ujjaṅgala”指粗糙、坚硬的地方。“dosinā”是从过失中离去,把 ta 音变成 na 音来说的。“天香”:就像天界里的香一样。“天”:生于天界的,所以叫天。两位长老,就是舍利弗长老和阿难长老。阿难长老暂且还有执取,因为他还没有漏尽;那舍利弗长老又怎么会这样呢?这种执取不是出于世俗情感的贪恋,而是出于对德行的敬重,所以不算过失。巴利
333. Kathā upacarati pavattati etthāti kathāupacāro, savanūpacāro padeso, taṃ kathāupacāraṃ. Ramaṇīyameva rāmaṇeyyakaṃ. Ujjaṅgaleti lūkhapadese kaṭhinapadese. Dosehi itā apagatāti dosinā ta-kārassa na-kāraṃ katvā. Dibbā maññe gandhāti devaloke gandhā viya. Divi bhavāti dibbā. Dve therāti sāriputtattheraānandattherā. Ānandatthero tāva mamāyatu akhīṇāsavabhāvato, sāriputtatthero kathanti? Na idaṃ mamāyanaṃ gehassitapemavasena, atha kho guṇabhattivasenāti nāyaṃ doso.
许可之问就是为获许可而问,是为了获得许可而发问。在这里,因为即使是不合正法的事,一旦上座已经同意,其他人就不能拒绝,所以这种许可必须去请求,因此应当从僧团中最年少的人开始征求许可。所以论中说“这就叫许可问”等等。“从年少者开始”,就是从最下座的人开始。能显现、能现起所想要表达的意义,就叫“辩才”,也就是所期望的那个意义,那个意义就是辩才。由处于局部智慧的人所说,就不会达到顶点和圆满;与一切知智相契合,就会达到顶点和圆满。为了用比喻说明已经说过的这个道理,所以说了“譬如”等话。其中,“案件”:敌人因此感到痛苦、难受,所以叫案件,也就是需要裁决的事。“村主”:案件出现在哪个村,就是那个村的治理者。“地方主”:案件出现在哪个地方,就是那个地方的治理者。“大断事大臣”:那个地方所属王国,在其王都中的大断事大臣。“将军”:那个大臣所属国王的将军。“副王”也是这样。不过这里只是按一般情况来说,应当理解为与所比喻的意义相对应。不会来回反复摇摆,因为事情已经由有资格裁决的人裁决过了。巴利
Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā, anumatiggahaṇatthaṃ pucchanaṃ. Tattha yasmā adhammikampi vuddhassa anumatiṃ itaro paṭikkhipituṃ na labhati, tena sā anujānitabbāva hoti, tasmā saṅghakhuddakato paṭṭhāya anumati pucchitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘anumatipucchā nāmesā’’tiādi. Khuddakato paṭṭhāyāti kaṇiṭṭhato paṭṭhāya. Paṭibhāti upaṭṭhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, yathādhippeto attho, taṃ paṭibhānaṃ. Sikhāppattā vepullappattā na bhavissati padesañāṇe ṭhitehi bhāsitattā. Sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditattā. Vuttamevatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paccatthikā aṭṭiyanti dukkhāyanti etenāti aṭṭo, vinicchitabbavohāro. Gāmabhojakanti yasmiṃ gāme so uppanno, taṃ gāmabhojakaṃ. Janapadabhojakanti yasmiṃ janapade so uppanno, taṃ janapadabhojakaṃ. Mahāvinicchayaamaccanti yasmiṃ rajje so janapado, tassa rājadhāniyaṃ mahāvinicchayaamaccaṃ. Senāpatinti yassa rañño so amacco, tassa senāpatiṃ. Tathā uparājanti . Idaṃ panettha pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ upameyyatthānurūpatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aparāparaṃ na sañcarati vinicchayanārahena vinicchitabhāvato.
“巴利”(pāḷi)这个词,来自“显扬”(pakaṭṭhāna)——因为它能让人明白戒等殊胜、卓越的意义;也因为诸佛等是以事物本然的语言来宣说的,所以那些殊胜的语句相续就称为“显扬”,也就是教法。“连结”(anusandhi)是指前一个意义和后一个意义之间的衔接。不过,从意义的角度来说,经典中的语句之间也有连结,这种连结分为四种:前后连结、提问连结、意乐连结、如义连结。而各种教说之间前后衔接的地方,就是“前后”。应当分别从巴利文的角度、连结的角度、前后的角度来配合理解。“所取”(uggahita)是指从文句和意义两方面向上向上地取持,也就是通过读诵和遍问而以心取持的意思。因为值得追求出离轮回之苦的人听闻,所以是“所闻”,即教法;他持守它,所以是“持闻者”。凡是持闻者,所闻在他那里是安住的、善安住的,因此说“是所闻的依止处”。所以他说“凡有……”等。“积集”(sannicaya)是指一字一音亦不坏失而聚集;所闻是他的积集,所以是“闻积集”。“深入之后而住立”——进入之后而安住。巴利
Pakaṭṭhānaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.22) ukkaṭṭhānaṃ sīlādiatthānaṃ bodhanato, sabhāvaniruttivasena buddhādīhi bhāsitattā ca pakaṭṭhānaṃ vacanappabandhānaṃ āḷīti pāḷi, pariyattidhammo. Purimassa atthassa pacchimena atthena anusandhānaṃ anusandhi. Atthamukhena pana pāḷipadesānampi anusandhi hotiyeva, so ca pubbāparānusandhi-pucchānusandhi-ajjhāsayānusandhi-yathānusandhivasena catubbidho. Taṃtaṃdesanānaṃ pana pubbāparasaṃsandanaṃ pubbāparaṃ. Pāḷivasena anusandhivasena pubbāparavasenāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Uggahitanti byañjanaso atthaso ca uddhaṃ uddhaṃ gahitaṃ, pariyāpuṇanavasena ceva paripucchāvasena ca hadayena gahitanti attho. Vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi sotabbato sutaṃ, pariyattidhammo, taṃ dhāretīti sutadharo. Yo hi sutadharo, sutaṃ tasmiṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ hoti suppatiṭṭhitaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sutassa ādhārabhūto’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādi. Ekapadaṃ ekakkharampi avinaṭṭhaṃ hutvā sannicīyatīti sannicayo, sutaṃ sannicayo etasminti sutasannicayo. Ajjhosāyāti anupavisitvā. Tiṭṭhatīti na mussati.
已住立、已熟练,就是已经稳固、能够随口诵出。不动摇,就是不被翻转、不改变。比对,就是和别人核对比较。问究,就是通过反复提问而深入理解意义。由于文脉没有间断、没有阻塞,所以像恒河的水流一样;也有读作“像有分相续流一样”的,意思是自然、安乐地运转。这里并不是指仅凭言语熟悉一部经或一部分经,而是指按品等类别来熟习,所以说“十经……乃至诵习”。也就是通过观察“十经已诵、十品已诵”等,以言语加以背诵,这就是其含义。以心意反复观察、逐分审察、思惟,就是意随观。像色法那样显现,就是像色法对眼睛那样,变得清晰分明而呈现。善通达,就是除去杂乱与纠结,善巧而如实地通达。巴利
Ṭhitā paguṇāti paguṇā vācuggatā. Niccalitanti aparivattitaṃ. Saṃsanditvāti aññehi saṃsanditvā. Samanuggāhitvāti paripucchāvasena atthaṃ ogāhetvā. Pabandhassa vibandhābhāvato gaṅgāsotasadisaṃ, ‘‘bhavaṅgasotasadisa’’nti vā pāṭho, akittimaṃ sukhappavattīti attho. Suttekadesassa suttassa ca vacasā paricayo idha nādhippeto, vaggādivasena pana adhippetoti āha ‘‘suttadasaka…pe… sajjhāyitā’’ti, ‘‘dasa suttāni gatāni, dasa vaggāgatā’’tiādinā sallakkhetvā vācāya sajjhāyitāti attho. Manasā anu anu pekkhitā bhāgaso nijjhāyitā cintitā manasānupekkhitā. Rūpagataṃ viya paññāyatīti rūpagataṃ viya cakkhussa vibhūtaṃ hutvā paññāyati. Suppaṭividdhāti nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā suṭṭhu yāthāvato paṭividdhā.
句:因为意义靠它而被知道,所以叫句;它又表达意义,所以叫文。因此说,句本身就是以文的身份来表达意义的,所以叫句文。字母完整,句文才圆满;而这种完整应当这样理解,所以说,不缺少十种对文的智慧。另作责难:就是从已安立的经典之外,再拿一部与它不相随顺的经典。引入其义:就是只对所拿来的那部经典的意义加以考察。他的说法就叫不圆满,因为意义不完整。如果只以解释已安立经典之义的方式,连带引入其他经典,那也不算出到一句之外。不抹消:就是不破坏。把各种意义好好确定并显示出来,就像用画笔划出界限一样。引导更深的意义,就像把水引进深渠;如果是浅渠,水就会越过边界流到别处去。仅一个词,却用多种方式反复解释,就像良马步步踏在脚步上一样。因为它以曲折的步态一步步踏着脚步前行。他通过这种说法方式,说法在法、义、关联、前后、师承上都圆满,所以叫圆满。巴利
Pajjati attho ñāyati etenāti padaṃ, tadeva atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjananti āha ‘‘padameva atthassa byañjanato padabyañjana’’nti. Akkharapāripūriyā padabyañjanassa parimaṇḍalatā, sā pana pāripūrī evaṃ veditabbāti āha ‘‘dasavidhabyañjanabuddhiyo aparihāpetvā’’ti. Aññaṃ upārambhakaranti yathānikkhittasuttato aññaṃ tassa ananulomakaṃ suttaṃ āharati. Tadatthaṃ otāretīti tassa āhaṭasuttasseva atthaṃ vicāreti. Tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti atthassa aparipuṇṇabhāvato. Yathānikkhittassa suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvaseneva suttantarampi ānento bahi ekapadampi na gacchati nāma. Amakkhentoti avināsento. Taṃ taṃ atthaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthitaṃ katvā dassento tulikāya paricchindanto viya. Gambhīrataramatthaṃ gamento gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya. Uttānamātikāya hi mariyādaṃ ottharitvā udakaṃ aññathā gaccheyya. Ekaṃyeva padaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi punappunaṃ saṃvaṇṇento padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya. So hi vaggitāya gatiyā pade padaṃ koṭṭento gacchati. Kathāmaggena tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti dhammato atthato anusandhito pubbāparato ācariyuggahatoti sabbaso paripuṇṇabhāvato.
所谓“连贯不断”,是指说得流畅、不卡顿。不太快也不太慢,中间不中断,而且始终一个味,随着听众的根机意乐来说法,这才叫“以流畅的方式说法”,不是别的样子。为了说明这一点,就说了“若有比丘……”等话。就像摩擦取火木,又像吃烫的东西那样,这是比喻说得太快;“刚抓住又抓取”之类,是比喻说法时跳过去一些内容。因为在枯叶堆的缝隙里,有时还能看到蜥蜴在活动;同样,某个人对意义的解释,在某些地方却完全看不到。“舍弃”是指搁置。以“任何人……”等语,说明不以同一形式说法。“饿鬼之火”,是指从饥渴饿鬼口中发出的火。“扩散”是指变得没有障碍。就像因某种疾病而受苦的人那样呻吟。像哭叫一样,是指大声喊叫。所谓“不连贯”,是因为不能顺利持续。所谓“住立于师授之方式”,意思是不舍离师长所教,并且完全依照师长们解释各部经典的方式、遵循同样的法则去解释。“令相续不断”,是指依前面所说“不太快、不太慢”等原则,编织成一条无有间断的相续。“为了断除随眠”,以此说明那段说法的最终归宿是阿拉汉果。“如此形相”,这里不应只就单一数来理解,而是说明在特征上发生,所以说“以如此形相的百比丘或千比丘”。“以结跏趺坐”,是指以结跏趺坐之处、以结跏趺坐的坐具。“以此方式”,是指示共同于各段的意义,而不共的意义则会另外说。巴利
Anuppabandhehīti vissaṭṭhehi āsajjamānehi. Nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ nirantaraṃ ekarasañca katvā parisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ kathento vissaṭṭhāya kathāya katheti nāma, na aññathāti dassento ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’tiādimāha. Araṇiṃ manthento viya, uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viyāti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ kathanassa udāharaṇaṃ, gahitaṃ gahitamevātiādi laṅghetvā kathanassa. Purāṇapaṇṇantaresu hi paripātiyamānagodhā kadāci dissati, evamekaccassa atthavaṇṇanā katthaci na dissati. Ohāyāti ṭhapetvā. Yopītiādinā ekarūpena kathāya akathanaṃ dasseti. Petaggi nijjhāmataṇhikapetassa mukhato niccharaṇakaaggi. Vitthāyatīti appaṭitānatamāpajjati. Kenaci rogena dukkhaṃ patto viya nitthunanto. Kandanto viyāti ukkuṭṭhiṃ karonto viya. Appabandhā nāma hoti sukhena appavattabhāvato. Ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhitoti ācariyuggahaṃ amuñcanto, yathā ca ācariyā taṃ taṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ, teneva nayena saṃvaṇṇentoti attho. Acchinnadhāraṃ katvāti ‘‘nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇika’’ntiādinā heṭṭhā vuttanayena avicchinnaṃ kathāpabandhaṃ katvā. Anusayasamugghātāyāti iminā tassā kathāya arahattapariyosānataṃ dasseti . Evarūpenāti nayidaṃ ekavacanaṃ tattakavasena gahetabbaṃ, atha kho lakkhaṇe pavattanti dassento ‘‘tathārūpeneva bhikkhusatena bhikkhusahassena vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pallaṅkenāti pallaṅkapadesena, pallaṅkāsanantenāti attho. Iminā nayenāti vārantarasādhāraṇaṃ atthaṃ atidisati, asādhāraṇaṃ pana vakkhatevāti.
334 因为以它为欢悦的对象,所以叫园林。巴利
334. Āramati etenāti ārāmo.
335 “常所亲近”是指固定不变地亲近。“重阁的庭院”是指重阁的广场。“立在脐上”是指立在大地之脐的位置上。“辐间”是指轮辐之间的空隙,也就是各各轮辐的正中间。巴利
335.Dhuvasevananti niyatasevitaṃ. Pāsādapariveṇeti pāsādaṅgaṇe. Nābhiyā patiṭṭhitānanti nābhiyā bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitānaṃ. Arantarānīti aravivarāni taṃtaṃarānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānāni.
336 受持林野头陀支的人,才叫林野住者,不是仅仅住在森林里就算。巴利
336.Samādinnaaraññadhutaṅgo āraññiko, na araññavāsamattena.
337 他们不使人沮丧,意思是不令人气馁,也不是带着使人气馁的心态互相提问。熟练者是指精通者。巴利
337.Naosādentīti na avasādenti, na avasādanāpekkhā aññamaññaṃ pañhaṃ pucchantīti attho. Pavattinīti paguṇā.
338 所谓出世间住等至,就是指长老的阿拉汉果等至;不过从另一种分类方式来说,也应该知道它可以包括灭尽定。巴利
338.Lokuttarā vihārasamāpatti nāma therassa arahattaphalasamāpattiyo, pariyāyato pana nirodhasamāpattipi veditabbā.
339 “萨度”是给阿难长老的。因此世尊说:“正如阿难正确地解说那样”等等。“正确地”意思是妥善地,也就是符合心意。凡是随顺心意而说出的,就叫做正确的话。确实,因为具足功德,能如此行、如实说的人,是值得称赞的。因此世尊说:“正是符合其身份的”等等。多闻比丘在各地经中,对于戒等出现之处,因为善知这些教导,能依教奉行而圆满它们,所以说“在戒出现的地方”等等。意思是:让弟子们把握能出生道等功德的观之胚胎,将其培育成熟。巴利
339.Sādhukāro ānandattherassa dinno. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yathā taṃ ānandova sammā byākaramāno byākareyyā’’tiādi. Sammāti suṭṭhu, yathāajjhāsayanti adhippāyo. Yena hi yaṃ yathācittaṃ kathitaṃ, taṃ sammā kathitaṃ nāma hoti. Sampattavasena hi yathākārī tathāvādī sobhati. Tenāha ‘‘attano anucchavikamevā’’tiādi. Bahussuto bhikkhu tattha tattha sutte sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne tesaṃ suviditattā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno tāni paripūretīti āha ‘‘sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne’’tiādi. Maggādipasavanāya vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā paripākaṃ gametvāti attho.
340 “正是这个道理”是以类推的方式,把简要所说的含义展开来说明,所以接着说了“具寿雷瓦达……”等话。巴利
340. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti atidesavasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘āyasmā hi revato’’tiādimāha.
342 还有其它各种烦恼,就是指嗔、痴等其它各种烦恼。抖落,就是彻底清除掉。巴利
342.Aparepinānappakāre kileseti aparepi nānappakāre dosamohādikilese. Dhunitvāti vidhametvā.
343 343. “具寿大目犍连如此解说”,这是连接句。并不是把眼识路过程中所有的心都当成眼识,而只是把依止于眼的那一个识称为眼识;紧接着眼识之后的是领受心,再紧接着是推度心等等——心与心之间的这种差别,极其微细、细密,而且只持续极短的刹那。至于“蕴等种种”,就是指蕴与蕴之间的差异等等。在地遍中进入初禅,然后以同样的方式进入第三禅等等,这是让所缘逐步推进,而跳过中间一个禅那来升进,叫做“禅那跳跃”。在地遍中进入初禅,然后再把同一个禅那转到火遍等等,这是让禅那逐步推进,而跳过中间一个所缘来升进,叫做“所缘跳跃”。从“初禅有五支”等等,一直到“非想非非想处有二支”,纯粹只是确定禅支本身,这是“支分别”。“这是地遍……这是白遍”等等,纯粹只是确定所缘本身,这是“所缘分别”。在地遍中进入初禅之后,就在同一个所缘上还进入其余诸禅,这是“支转换”。在地遍中进入初禅之后,把同一个初禅转到水遍等等,像这样在一切遍处中进入同一个禅那,这是“所缘转换”。“单方面增广”和“双方面增广”,这在蕴等教说中可以见到。因为在《阿毗达摩分别》中,世尊分别受蕴时,取三法放入二法,取二法放入三法,这就是“单方面增广”。又以“双方面增广”的方式,在三法和二法中都加以宣说,这就是“双方面增广”。同样地,在其余诸蕴、界、处等当中,也应该按照《分别论》阿毗达摩分别中所说的方法来理解。因此他说“这只有阿毗达摩论师和说法师才清楚明白”。对于蕴等自性法、三特相、概念以及其它宗派学说,因为没有善巧,就不知道“这是我的立场,这是别人的立场”。正因为如此,他对于自己的立场……乃至……对不同的法产生误解。然而,阿毗达摩论师因为对蕴等具有善巧,所以对自己的立场……乃至……不会产生误解。巴利
343. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno evaṃ byākāsīti sambandho. Sakalampi cakkhuviññāṇavīthigataṃ cittaṃ cakkhuviññāṇanti aggahetvā cakkhusannissitameva pana viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ santīraṇantiādinā saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ atiittarakhaṇavantaṃ cittantaraṃ cittanānattaṃ. Khandhādīnañca nānattasaṅkhātaṃ khandhantarādi. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tatheva tatiyaṃ jhānantiādinā ārammaṇaṃ anukkamitvā jhānasseva ekantarikabhāvena ukkamanaṃ jhānokkantikaṃ nāma. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā puna tadeva tejokasiṇetiādinā jhānaṃ anukkamitvā ārammaṇasseva ekantarikabhāvena ukkamanaṃ ārammaṇokkantikaṃ nāma. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānaṃ pañcaṅgika’’ntiādinā yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ duvaṅgikanti jhānaṅgamattasseva vavatthāpanaṃ aṅgavavatthānaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ…pe… idaṃ odātakasiṇa’’nti ārammaṇamattasseva vavatthāpanaṃ ārammaṇavavatthānaṃ. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tattheva itaresampi samāpajjanaṃ aṅgasaṅkanti. Pathavīkasiṇe paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tadeva āpokasiṇeti evaṃ sabbakasiṇesu ekasseva jhānassa samāpajjanaṃ ārammaṇasaṅkanti. Ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhananti idaṃ khandhādidesanāyaṃ labbhati. Abhidhammabhājanīye hi vedanākkhandhaṃ bhājento bhagavā tike gahetvā dukesu pakkhipi, duke gahetvā tikesu pakkhipi, idaṃ ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ. Tike ca duke ca ubhatovaḍḍhananīhārena kathesi, idaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhanaṃ. Evaṃ sesakhandhesu dhātāyatanādīsu ca yathārahaṃ vibhaṅgappakaraṇe (vibha. 32-33; 155-156, 183-184) abhidhammabhājanīye āgatanayena veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ābhidhammikadhammakathikasseva pākaṭa’’nti. Khandhādīsu sabhāvadhammesu tīsu lakkhaṇesu paññattiyaṃ samayantaresu ca kosallābhāvato ayaṃ sakavādo ayaṃ paravādoti na jānāti. Tato eva sakavādaṃ…pe… dhammantaraṃ visaṃvādeti. Khandhādīsu pana kusalatāya ābhidhammiko sakavādaṃ…pe… na visaṃvādeti.
344 心能够被自己掌控,是因为他有审察和修习的力量,能够统摄心的运作。现在,为了从反面和正面说明这个道理,就说了“劣慧者”等话。其中,“他的一切”是指属于他的一切。“邪行妄动”是指以烦恼为根源的扭曲行为和恶行的动荡。“打碎后”就是粉碎之后。“之外”是指业处之外,在各种所缘上。巴利
344.Cittaṃattano vase vattetuṃ sakkoti paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalehi pariggaṇhanasamatthattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘duppañño hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbānassāti sabbāni assa. Visevitavipphanditānīti kilesavisūkāyikāni ceva duccaritavipphanditāni ca. Bhañjitvāti madditvā. Bahīti kammaṭṭhānato bahi puthuttārammaṇe.
345 “以方便”在这里,“方便”这个词,就像“婆罗门,确实有一个方便”等句子中那样,是原因的意思。所以他说“有极妙的原因”。如果世尊说“在这里,舍利弗,比丘午后从团食返回……”这段话,是就他自己的大菩提座而说的,那么这样一来,就会得出寺院只应由正自觉者来庄严、而不应由其他人来庄严的结论。因此他说“况且为了未来的人们……”等等。“以涅槃为目标的修行是其精髓”,所以叫“行道精髓”,就是指那种修行精髓。“以无方便”就是没有任何方便、借口,完全直截了当地。一个人立下“不证得阿拉汉果就不起身”的坚定誓愿而坐下,直到证得阿拉汉果才起身。正是由这样的人,这片牛角沙罗树林才得以庄严。意思是说,在教法中,一切努力都以阿拉汉果为目标。发起能带来漏尽的修行,并以漏尽来结束开示,因此,说法是顺着法谈的理趣而圆满收束的。巴利
345.Pariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo ‘‘atthi khvesa, brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 3-9) viya kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthī’’ti. Yadi bhagavā – ‘‘idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto’’tiādinā attano mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ sandhāyāha, evaṃ sante sammāsambuddheheva saṅghārāmo sobhetabbo, na aññehīti āpannanti āha ‘‘apica pacchimaṃ janata’’ntiādi. Nibbānatthāya paṭipattisāraṃ etassāti paṭipattisāro, taṃ paṭipattisāraṃ. Nippariyāyenevāti kenaci pariyāyena lesena vinā mukhyena nayeneva. Yo ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā na vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti daḷhasamādānaṃ katvā nisinno taṃ adhigantvāva uṭṭhahati. Evarūpena idaṃ gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobhati, sāsane sabbārambhānaṃ tadatthattāti attho. Āsavakkhayāvahaṃ paṭipattiṃ ārabhitvā āsavakkhayeneva desanāya pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
3. 《大牧牛者经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāgopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
346 这里说的“其中”,是指在《牧牛人经》里。所谓“三种说法”,是指三部义注,也就是对这部经的义理解释有三种方式。每一句都像一根管子、一个根本,所以叫“单管式”;或者说,每一句都是让义理显现出来的管道,所以叫“单管式”。因此说“逐句解释每一句的义理”。有四个部分或四个方面作为把握义理的方法,所以叫“四方式”。因此说“结成四句一组来讲说”。确定坐下来之后,所开始讲说的规则和圆满都具备,所以叫“坐定而说式”;意思是对已经开始的义理,能一项一项分别讲到最后。因此说“先指出那位智者牧牛人”等等。“逐每一句”是说,不按整体归纳的方式把许多句的意思合在一起讲,而是对每一句单独解释它的义理。这种方式在一切经典中都能见到。“结成四句一组”是说,在黑分中把譬喻和所喻两者配成一对,白分中也同样,这样把四句组合起来。这种方式只在像这样的经典中才有。“达到终点”有两种说法。有些论师说:在黑分中先显示譬喻,而譬喻只是为了让人通达所喻,所以引出所喻的意义;接着讲杂染分,是为了显明清净分,因此也按譬喻和所喻分别的方式引出白分,从而使整部经的义理达到终点。先显示黑分中的所喻之后,再让它达到终点等等,也是同样的道理。另一些论师则说:在黑分和白分中,把各自的譬喻和所喻的意义分别一一讲完,各自达到圆满,这才叫“达到终点”。这里说的“这”,就是指坐定而说式。“在此处”,就是在这部《牧牛人经》中。“为一切先师所通行”,是说这种解释方式被所有过去的导师们所采用、所赞叹,而且圣典也是照这样流传下来的。巴利
346.Tatthāti gopālakasutte. Tisso kathāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.11.17) tisso aṭṭhakathā, tividhā suttassa atthavaṇṇanāti attho. Ekekaṃ padaṃ nāḷaṃ mūlaṃ etissāti evaṃsaññitā ekanāḷikā, ekekaṃ vā padaṃ nāḷaṃ atthaniggamanamaggo etissāti ekanāḷikā. Tenāha ‘‘ekekapadassa atthakathana’’nti. Cattāro aṃsā bhāgā atthasallakkhaṇūpāyā etissāti caturassā. Tenāha ‘‘catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathana’’nti. Niyamato nisinnassa āraddhassa vatto saṃvatto etissā atthīti nisinnavattikā, yathāraddhassa atthassa visuṃ visuṃ pariyosāpikāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā’’tiādi. Ekekapadassāti piṇḍatthadassanavasena bahunnaṃ padānaṃ ekajjhaṃ atthaṃ akathetvā ekamekassa padassa atthavaṇṇanā. Ayaṃ sabbattheva labbhati. Catukkaṃ bandhitvāti kaṇhapakkhe upamūpameyyadvayaṃ, tathā sukkapakkheti idaṃ catukkaṃ yojetvā. Ayaṃ īdisesu eva suttesu labbhati. Pariyosānagamananti keci tāva āhu – ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe upamaṃ dassetvā upamā ca nāma yāvadeva upameyyasampaṭidānatthāti upameyyatthaṃ āharitvā saṃkilesapakkhaniddeso ca vodānapakkhavibhāvanatthāyāti sukkapakkhampi upamūpameyyavibhāgena āharitvā suttatthassa pariyosāpana’’nti. Kaṇhapakkhe upameyyaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanādīsupi eseva nayo. Apare pana ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe sukkapakkhe ca taṃtaṃupamūpameyyatthānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pariyosāpetvāva kathanaṃ pariyosānagamana’’nti vadanti. Ayanti nisinnavattikā. Idhāti imasmiṃ gopālakasutte. Sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇāti sabbehipi pubbācariyehi ācaritā saṃvaṇṇitā, tathā ceva pāḷi pavattāti.
“支”就是按组成部分而被认知的,所以叫支,也就是部分。不过在这里,因为它们本质上都是有过失的,所以说“以支”就是指“以不善的部分”。“牛群”就是牛聚集在一起。“守护”就是保护。而那种守护是护持着牛群四处走动,所以说“护持着走动”。“增长”是指牛的数量变多,也就是所谓牛乳等丰足的那种增长。以“有这么多”而被认知,所以叫“色”,这既包括数量上的限定,也包括身体的形貌,因此说“从计算上或从颜色上”。他不去寻找,是因为根本不知道牛已经丢失了。在“青色”这个词里,iti 是“等等”的意思,用它来涵盖白色、杂色等颜色。巴利
Aṅgīyanti avayavabhāvena ñāyantīti aṅgāni, bhāgā. Tāni panettha yasmā sāvajjasabhāvāni, tasmā āha ‘‘aṅgehīti aguṇakoṭṭhāsehī’’ti. Gomaṇḍalanti gosamūhaṃ. Pariharitunti rakkhituṃ. Taṃ pana pariharaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vicaraṇanti āha ‘‘pariggahetvā vicaritu’’nti. Vaḍḍhinti gunnaṃ bahubhāvaṃ bahugorasatāsaṅkhātaṃ parivuddhiṃ. ‘‘Ettakamida’’nti rūpīyatīti rūpaṃ, parimānaparicchedopi sarīrarūpampīti āha ‘‘gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā’’ti. Na pariyesati vinaṭṭhabhāvasseva ajānanato. Nīlāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena setasabalādivaṇṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在“弓、矛、标枪等”这一句里,弓的标志,是射箭师们烙在牛身上的印记;矛的标志,是库玛拉巴蒂伽族人烙在牛身上的印记;标枪的标志,是伊萨拉巴蒂伽族人烙在牛身上的印记——应当这样连接理解。用“等”这个字,还包括了拉玛瓦苏迭瓦族等烙在牛身上的斧、轮等标志。巴利
Dhanusattisūlādīti ettha issāsācariyānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ dhanulakkhaṇaṃ. Kumārabhattigaṇānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ sattilakkhaṇaṃ. Issarabhattigaṇānaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ sūlalakkhaṇanti yojanā. Ādi-saddena rāmavāsudevagaṇādīnaṃ gāvīsu kataṃ pharasucakkādilakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
青蝇是指黄褐色的苍蝇,或者就是小苍蝇。它能叮咬、刺蜇,因此叫sāṭikā;长成的sāṭikā就叫āsāṭikā。因此下文说“增长的”等等。巴利
Nīlamakkhikāti piṅgalamakkhikā, khuddamakkhikā eva vā. Saṭati rujati etāyāti sāṭikā, saṃvaddhā sāṭikāti āsāṭikā. Tenāha ‘‘vaḍḍhantī’’tiādi.
用树皮做的衣服,叫“树皮衣”。用破布片做的衣服,叫“破布衣”。在雨季期间,就是在雨季里面。没有鳄鱼等抓取,是指没有鳄鱼等会抓取的水中动物。已被喝过,是指饮用水已被喝过的状态。因为有狮子、老虎等危险,所以那里让人害怕、恐惧。巴利
Vākenāti vākapattena. Cīrakenāti pilotikena. Antovasseti vassakālassa abbhantare. Niggāhanti susumārādiggāharahitaṃ. Pītanti pānīyassa pītabhāvaṃ. Sīhabyagghādiparissayena sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo.
已经五个夜晚成为此者,所以叫“五夜”;这个周期本身就是“五夜一轮”。同样,也应该知道“七夜一轮”是这样的。“惯行处”:就是经常去的地方,也就是已经被当作行境而执取的地方。巴利
Pañca ahāni bhūtāni etassāti pañcāhito, so eva vāroti pañcāhikavāro. Evaṃ sattāhikavāroti veditabbo. Ciṇṇaṭṭhānanti caritaṭṭhānaṃ gocaraggahitaṭṭhānaṃ.
父亲应尽的责任,就是父亲该做的事,也就是父亲应当完成的义务。按照牛的喜好带着牛出发,意思是按照牛的喜好,带它们到适合觅食的地方或者河对岸去。牛食,是指混了棉籽等东西、专门给牛吃的食物;这里既然提到了食物,粥也算在里面了。巴利
Pituṭṭhānanti pitarā kātabbaṭṭhānaṃ, pitarā kātabbakaraṇanti attho. Yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchantīti gunnaṃ rucianurūpaṃ gocarabhūmiyaṃ vā nadipāraṃ vā gahetvā gacchanti. Gobhattanti kappāsaṭṭhikādimissaṃ gobhuñjitabbaṃ bhattaṃ, bhattaggahaṇeneva yāgupi gahitā.
347 347. 为了说明所说的“以两种行相”是哪两种行相,所以说了“从计算上或从起源上”。经典中出现的这些色法即是如此:把“生”分为“积集”和“相续”两种,不把心所依处算进去,在《色蕴品》的经典(《法集论》651-655)中就这样说:“十处、十五种微细色”。二十五个色部分:因为它们各有自己的特相,彼此不混杂,所以是色的部分。或者,“色部分”是指它们不是各自单独生起,而是以色聚的方式生起,因此就是色聚。“部分”即分支、肢体之义。或者,“部分”指身体,身体的各部分如头发等是“部分”,其他肢体的部分也如同部分一样是部分。“犹如”是比喻的对应。其中,“取色”是以观智从特相上把握如前所说的色。“确定非色”是依止那色、并以它为所缘而生起的受等四蕴,将其确定为“非色”。“取色与非色”,是再次在那里取色与非色:凡有变坏特相者是色,其余是非色,离开这两者没有任何东西是自我或属于自我的。并且,对那两者以无明等为缘而观察为有缘,把握缘之后,安立无常等特相;凡不能通过聚的思惟等次第使业处达到顶点者,他就不增长,这是连接。巴利
347.‘‘Dvīhākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ ākāradvayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gaṇanato vā samuṭṭhānato vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatāti ‘‘upacayo santatī’’ti jātiṃ dvidhā bhinditvā hadayavatthuṃ aggahetvā ‘‘dasa āyatanāni pañcadasa sukhumarūpānī’’ti evaṃ rūpakaṇḍapāḷiyaṃ (dha. sa. 651-655) āgatā. Pañcavīsati rūpakoṭṭhāsāti salakkhaṇato aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvato rūpabhāgā. Rūpakoṭṭhāsāti vā visuṃ visuṃ appavattitvā kalāpabhāveneva pavattanato rūpakalāpā. Koṭṭhāsāti ca aṃsā, avayavāti attho. Koṭṭhanti vā sarīraṃ, tassa aṃsā kesādayo koṭṭhāsāti aññepi avayavā koṭṭhāsā viya koṭṭhāsā. Seyyathāpīti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Tattha rūpaṃ pariggahetvāti yathāvuttaṃ rūpaṃ salakkhaṇato ñāṇena pariggaṇhitvā. Arūpaṃ vavatthapetvāti taṃ rūpaṃ nissāya ārammaṇañca katvā pavattamāne vedanādike cattāro khandhe ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvāti puna tattha yaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ, tadaññaṃ arūpaṃ, ubhayavinimuttaṃ kiñci natthi attā vā attaniyaṃ vāti evaṃ rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā. Tadubhayañca avijjādinā paccayena sappaccayanti paccayaṃ sallakkhetvā aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā yo kalāpasammasanādikkamena kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti, so na vaḍḍhatīti yojanā.
这些色法属于“单一起源”是指:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、女根、男根、命根这八种,以业为起源;身表和语表这两种,以心为起源——以上这些色法就是单一起源。声处这一种,以时节和心为双重起源。色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性——这些色法以时节、心、食为三重起源。色处、香处、味处、触处、空界、水界、段食——这些色法以时节、心、食、业为四重起源。至于积集、相续、老性、色的无常性——对于这些色法,他不知道它们并不从任何因生起。在“不知道色的起源”等说法中,应当依照“不知道色的计算”等处所讲的方式来理解。巴利
Ettakaṃrūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānanti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotaghānajivhākāyāyatanaṃ itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyanti aṭṭhavidhaṃ kammavasena, kāyaviññatti vacīviññattīti idaṃ dvayaṃ cittavasenāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Saddāyatanamekaṃ utucittavasena dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Rūpassa lahutā mudutā kammaññatāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ utucittāhāravasena tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Rūpagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ākāsadhātu āpodhātu kabaḷīkāro āhāroti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ utucittāhārakammavasena catusamuṭṭhānaṃ. Upacayo santati jaratā rūpassa aniccatāti ettakaṃ rūpaṃ na kutoci samuṭṭhātīti na jānāti. Samuṭṭhānato rūpaṃ ajānantotiādīsu vattabbaṃ ‘‘gaṇanato rūpaṃ ajānanto’’tiādesu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
所谓“业相”,就是自己造作的恶行成为他的标记,所以叫“业相”,这是指愚人。确实有这样的说法:“比丘们,愚人有三种愚人的标记。是哪三种?就是想着恶的念头、说着恶的话语、做着恶的行为。比丘们,这些就是……标记。”(《增支部》3.2;《导论》116)自己造作的善行成为他的标记,所以叫“业相”,这是指智者。这也有说法:“比丘们,智者有三种智者的标记。是哪三种?就是想着善的念头、说着善的话语、做着善的行为。比丘们,这些就是……智者的标记。”(《中部》3.253;《增支部》3.3;《导论》116)因此说:“善业和不善业是智者和愚者的标记。”“避开愚者却不亲近智者”,意思是:一个真正想求利益的人,本该避开愚人、亲近智者,他却不这样做。为了显示这样做的人会有什么过患,所以又说了“避开愚者”等话。在这里,凡是世尊允许说“这对你们是适合的”,并且与这允许相符的,就是“适合的”;凡是世尊禁止说“这对你们是不适合的”,并且与这禁止相符的,就是“不适合的”。凡是出于善巧的,就是“善”;与它相反的,就是“不善”。善就是“没有过失的”,不善就是“有过失的”。从犯戒来说,最初两种犯戒类别是重的,其余的是轻的。从法来说,过失大的是重的,过失小的是轻的。有对治方法的是可治疗的,没有对治方法的是不可治疗的。随顺法性的是有因的,其余的是无因的。不了解这些的人,也就是不了解适合与不适合、重与轻、可治疗与不可治疗,就不能以极清净的方式守护戒律;不了解善与不善、有过失与无过失、有因与无因的人,因为在诸蕴等方面不善巧,连对色与非色的把握都做不到,更不用说取业处来修行增长了。因此说“取业处来增长,他做不到”。巴利
Kammalakkhaṇoti attanā kataṃ duccaritakammaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti kammalakkhaṇo, bālo. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Duccintitacintī hoti, dubbhāsitabhāsī, dukkaṭakammakārī. Imāni kho…pe… lakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.2; netti. 116). Attanā kataṃ sucaritakammaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti kammalakkhaṇo, paṇḍito. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Sucintitacintī hoti, subhāsitabhāsī, sukatakammakārī. Imāni kho…pe… paṇḍitalakkhaṇānī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.253; a. ni. 3.3; netti. 116). Tenāha ‘‘kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ paṇḍitamālalakkhaṇa’’nti. Bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite na sevatīti yaṃ bālapuggale vajjetvā paṇḍitasevanaṃ atthakāmena kātabbaṃ, taṃ na karoti. Tathābhūtassa ayamādīnavoti dassetuṃ puna ‘‘bāle vajjetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘idaṃ vo kappatī’’ti anuññātaṃ, tadanulomañce, taṃ kappiyaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vo na kappatī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ, tadanulomañce, taṃ akappiyaṃ. Yaṃ kosallasambhūtaṃ, taṃ kusalaṃ, tappaṭipakkhaṃ akusalaṃ. Tadeva sāvajjaṃ, kusalaṃ anavajjaṃ. Āpattito ādito dve āpattikkhandhā garukaṃ, tadaññaṃ lahukaṃ. Dhammato mahāsāvajjaṃ garukaṃ, appasāvajjaṃ lahukaṃ. Sappaṭikāraṃ satekiccaṃ, appaṭikāraṃ atekicchaṃ. Dhammatānugataṃ kāraṇaṃ, itaraṃ akāraṇaṃ. Taṃ ajānantoti kappiyākappiyaṃ garukalahukaṃ satekicchātekicchaṃ ajānanto suvisuddhaṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkoti, kusalākusalaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ ajānanto khandhādīsu akusalatāya rūpārūpapariggahampi kātuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhanā. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
邪思惟就在犹如牛疮一般的自身当中生起;在那里,由于它们是苦生起的因,所以那些邪思惟就像牛蝇一样。因此说“把不善思惟当作牛蝇一样除去”。巴利
Govaṇasadise attabhāve uppajjitvā tattha dukkhuppattihetuto micchāvitakkā āsāṭikā viyāti āsāṭikāti āha ‘‘akusalavitakkaṃ āsāṭikaṃ ahāretvā’’ti.
“痈疽”正是五取蕴的别名——依据《增支部》8.56这样说。就像有六个疮口不断流脓的痈疽,要用碎布片盖住;同样,从六门不断流出烦恼不净的有身之疮,应当以正念防护来遮盖。但这位牧牛人却不这样做,所以说:如同那牧牛人不遮盖疮口,他也就不能成就防护。巴利
‘‘Gaṇḍoti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti vacanato (a. ni. 8.56) chahi vaṇamukhehi vissandamānayūso gaṇḍo viya pilotikakhaṇḍena chahi dvārehi vissandamānakilesāsuci attabhāvavaṇo satisaṃvarena pidahitabbo, ayaṃ pana evaṃ na karotīti āha ‘‘yathā so gopālako vaṇaṃ na paṭicchādeti, evaṃ saṃvaraṃ na sampādetī’’ti.
就像烟依靠柴火生起,它细微轻柔,钻进一个个缝隙弥漫开来,能驱除众生被蚊虻等侵扰的危险,又是火焰腾起的前导;同样,说法之智依靠作为柴火的色法与无色法而生起,它细微轻柔,钻进一个个蕴间与处间弥漫开来,能驱除众生邪思惟等危险,是智慧火焰腾起的前导。因为像烟一样,所以叫“烟”。因此说:“牧牛人不造说法之烟,就像不造烟一样。”走到自己身边坐下的人,应当为他讲与之相应的法谈,这叫“近坐谈”;对已做的布施等功德作随喜之谈,这叫“随喜谈”。这里说“此”,是因为他不做说法等事。既然不知道他是“多闻、有德之人”,为什么还要这样说呢?难道为了让人了解自己,说法等事就不该做吗?确实,本来就不该做,但这里是就清净心说法时,能让人知道说法者的功德这一点而说的。因此世尊说:巴利
Yathā dhūmo indhanaṃ nissāya uppajjamāno saṇho sukhumo taṃ taṃ vivaraṃ anupavissa byāpento sattānaṃ ḍaṃsamakasādiparissayaṃ vinodeti, aggijālasamuṭṭhānassa pubbaṅgamo hoti, evaṃ dhammadesanāñāṇassa indhanabhūtaṃ rūpārūpadhammajātaṃ nissāya uppajjamānā saṇhā sukhumā taṃ taṃ khandhantaraṃ āyatanantarañca anupavissa byāpeti, sattānaṃ micchāvitakkādiparissayaṃ vinodeti, ñāṇaggijālasamuṭṭhānassa pubbaṅgamoti dhūmo viyāti dhūmoti āha ‘‘gopālako dhūmaṃ viya dhammadesanādhūmaṃ na karotī’’ti. Attano santikaṃ upagantvā nisinnassa kātabbā tadanucchavikā dhammakathā upanisinnakathā. Katassa dānādipuññassa anumodanakathā anumodanā. Tatoti dhammakathādīnaṃ akaraṇato. ‘‘Bahussuto guṇavā’’ti na jānantīti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu attano jānāpanatthaṃ dhammakathādi na kātabbamevāti? Saccaṃ, na kātabbameva, suddhāsayena pana dhamme kathite tassa guṇajānanataṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā –
“ 不言语者人不知,智者混迹愚人中;
当说法令法光显,高举仙人法幢旗。”巴利
‘‘Nābhāsamānaṃ jānanti, missaṃ bālehi paṇḍitaṃ; Bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṃ, paggaṇhe isinaṃ dhaja’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 2.241);
“渡处”就是人们在这里渡过去的地方,也就是为了洗澡等目的而进入河流、池塘的入口处。然而,就像水能冲掉进入水中的众生身上的污垢、消除疲劳、带来清净一样,多闻者也能用法水为来到自己身边的众生冲掉内心的污垢、消除疲劳、带来清净。因此,他们就像渡处一样,所以叫“渡处”。所以经文说“作为渡处的多闻比丘”。“这句话该怎么安立它的表述?”——尊者,这个音节、这个声音,该怎么安立在这个意思上?它以什么方式成为表达这个意思的能诠?或者应读作“应当安立”,意思是:这个自性词,怎么在这里通行?这是在问这句话的字面意思。问“在这个地方,巴利文说什么?”是在问句义。问“意思显示什么?”是在问句义或暗示义。他不遍问,是指完全不以断除疑惑的方式提问。他不遍问,是指不反复表明自己想了解的心意,不加以阐明,所以说“不令他人知道”。“开示”,是指把义理分析之后再说出来,所以说“不分析而展示”。“未令明显”,是指没有被智慧照亮的、隐藏的、覆盖的义理。“不令明显”,就是像不把须弥山脚下的沙子挖出来,或者像不把地下的水拨开让人看见一样,不加以揭示。这样,多闻者因为何法而在方便上被称为“渡处”,现在为了显示该法在非方便上就是渡处,故说“如……”等。因为人们借由此法渡向名为涅槃的池塘,所以被称为“渡处”。因此苏弥陀佛时的世尊说:巴利
Taranti etthāti titthaṃ, nadītaḷākādīnaṃ nahānādiatthaṃ otaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā pana taṃ udakena otiṇṇasattānaṃ sarīramalaṃ pavāheti, parissamaṃ vinodeti, visuddhiṃ uppādeti, evaṃ bahussutā attano samīpaṃ otiṇṇasattānaṃ dhammūdakena cittamalaṃ pavāhenti, parissamaṃ vinodenti, visuddhiṃ uppādenti, tasmā te titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘titthabhūte bahussutabhikkhū’’ti. Byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbanti, bhante, idaṃ byañjanaṃ ayaṃ saddo kathaṃ imasmiṃ atthe ropetabbo, kena pakārena imassa atthassa vācako jāto. ‘‘Nirūpetabba’’nti vā pāṭho, nirūpetabbaṃ ayaṃ sabhāvanirutti kathamettha niruḷhāti adhippāyo. Imassa bhāsitassa ko atthoti saddatthaṃ pucchati. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti imasmiṃ pāḷipadese. Pāḷi kiṃ vadetīti bhāvatthaṃ pucchati. Attho kiṃ dīpetīti bhāvatthaṃ vā saṅketatthaṃ vā. Na paripucchatīti vimaticchedanapucchāvasena sabbaso pucchaṃ na karoti. Na paripañhatīti pari pari attano ñātuṃ icchaṃ na ācikkhati na vibhāveti. Tenāha ‘‘na jānāpetī’’ti. Teti bahussutabhikkhū. Vivaraṇaṃ nāma atthassa vibhajitvā kathananti āha ‘‘bhājetvā na dassentī’’ti. Anuttānīkatanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkataṃ guyhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ. Na uttānīkarontīti sinerumūlakaṃ vālikaṃ uddharanto viya pathavīsandhārodakaṃ vivaritvā dassento viya ca uttānaṃ na karonti. Evaṃ yassa dhammassa vasena bahussutā ‘‘tittha’’nti vuttā pariyāyato, idāni tameva dhammaṃ nippariyāyato titthanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhammo hi taranti etena nibbānaṃ nāma taḷākanti ‘‘tittha’’nti vuccati. Tenāha bhagavā sumedhabhūto –
“ 如是,当涤除烦恼垢的不死湖存在之时,
人不寻求彼湖,其咎非在不死湖。”巴利
‘‘Evaṃ kilesamaladhovaṃ, vijjante amatantaḷe; Na gavesati taṃ taḷākaṃ, na doso amatantaḷe’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.14);
他根本不知道法本身就是通向涅槃的渡口,也不知道该怎么渡过去,所以被称为“不知法渡处”。巴利
Dhammasseva nibbānassotaraṇatitthabhūtassa otaraṇapakāraṃ ajānanto ‘‘dhammatitthaṃ na jānātī’’ti vutto.
“已饮未饮”:在牛群里,他分不清哪些牛已经饮过水、哪些还没饮过,也找不到。因为找不到,所以说他“得不到”。说完“得不到利益”之后,为了说明他得不到的情形,就接着说“前往听法众集会处”等等。巴利
Pītāpītanti gogaṇe pītaṃ apītañca gorūpaṃ na jānāti na vindati. Avindanto hi na labhatīti vutto. ‘‘Ānisaṃsaṃ na vindatī’’ti vatvā tassa avindanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā’’tiādimāha.
这里说的“圣”这个词,是针对“出世间”这个词而说的。也可以从“近缘”的角度理解为:它排除了无间违害;或者把“圣”这个词看作“没有过失”的同义词。至于“八支”,则应当既按一一各支分别理解,也按合起来为八支来理解;通常就说为“有八支”。这样理解之后,七支圣道也就被含摄在内了。巴利
Ayaṃ lokuttaroti padaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ariya’’nti. Paccāsattiñāyena anantaravidhippaṭisedho vā, ariya-saddo vā niddosapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhaṅgikanti ca visuṃ ekajjhañca aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ upādāya gahetabbaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgatā bāhullato ca. Evañca katvā sattaṅgassapi ariyamaggassa saṅgaho siddho hoti.
在讲到“四念处”等地方时,没有加以区分,就直接说了“念处”。其中,以身体、感受、心、法为所缘的念处,是世间的;而在这些念处当中,以破除愚痴的方式生起、以涅槃为所缘的念处,是出世间的。像这样,他不能如实了知:这些是世间的,这些是出世间的。巴利
Cattāro satipaṭṭhānetiādīsu avisesena satipaṭṭhānā vuttā. Tattha kāyavedanācittadhammārammaṇā satipaṭṭhānā lokiyā, tattha sammohaviddhaṃsanavasena pavattā nibbānārammaṇā lokuttarāti evaṃ ime lokiyā, ime lokuttarāti yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti.
“无余地榨取”是说,接受时不知道适量,对某些施主就毫无保留地榨取,使对方信心受损;对某些资具也毫无保留地榨取,使资具损耗。通过言语来献上,就是“语献上”;通过资具来献上,就是“资具献上”。巴利
Anavasesaṃ duhatīti paṭiggahaṇe mattaṃ ajānanto kismiñci dāyake saddhāhāniyā kismiñci paccayahāniyā anavasesaṃ duhati. Vācāya abhihāro vācābhihāro. Paccayānaṃ abhihāro paccayābhihāro.
这些人对我们不生起尊重和恭敬之心。这句话是在说明:新比丘们没有依教奉行,因为他们对老师和戒师没有生起像对父亲那样的敬爱。通过指出他们缺乏对学处的恭敬等,就表明他们没有资格被摄受;因此,长老们对他们也不加以摄受。因为那些依靠戒等功德而在教法中达到稳固的同梵行者,不会去摄受不该摄受的人,也不会做没有意义的摄受。所以经文才说“新比丘”。“法说结集”:指从传承而来的、各类法义说解的脉络。与四谛、有情、结生、缘起行相相联系、阐明空性的深奥经教。以所说颠倒为依据——如同在“非色知者”等表述中所说的遮遣,以遮止、不执取的方式来领会。作了连接之后——即依“以色为知者,从计算或从外表而知色”等,以及“他的牛群不减少,也不因受用五种乳制品而成为局外人”等,将义理连接起来。应当理解——在每一处,应如其所应地理解其义。巴利
Ime amhesu garucittīkāraṃ na karontīti iminā navakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti ācariyupajjhāyesu pitupemassa anupaṭṭhāpanato. Tena ca sikkhāgāravatābhāvadīpanena saṅgahassa abhājanabhāvaṃ, tena therānaṃ tesu anuggahābhāvaṃ. Na hi sīlādiguṇehi sāsane thirabhāvappattā ananuggahetabbe sabrahmacārī anuggaṇhanti, niratthakaṃ vā anuggahaṃ karonti. Tenāha ‘‘navake bhikkhū’’ti. Dhammakathābandhanti paveṇiāgataṃ pakiṇṇakadhammakathāmaggaṃ. Saccasattapaṭisandhipaccayākārapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suññatādīpanaṃ guyhaganthaṃ. Vuttavipallāsavasenāti ‘‘na rūpaññū’’tiādīsu vuttassa paṭisedhassa paṭikkhepavasena aggahaṇavasena. Yojetvāti ‘‘rūpaññū hotīti gaṇanāto vā vaṇṇato vā rūpaṃ jānātī’’tiādinā, ‘‘tassa gogaṇopi na parihāyati, pañcagorasaparibhogatopi na paribāhiro hotī’’tiādinā ca atthaṃ yojetvā. Veditabboti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ padese yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo.
《小牧牛者经》的注释巴利
4. Cūḷagopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
350 350.“布炬”指用布做成的火炬。布在这里成了火炬,所以叫“布炬城”。对肉眼来说,整条恒河清清楚楚地显现,明显可见;但对天眼或一切眼来说,即使世尊坐在任何地方,恒河也一样清清楚楚地显现。“安稳”是没有灾祸。“增长”是不退失。“无病”是健康、没有疾病。巴利
350.Celukkāhīti celamayāhi ukkāhi. Ukkabhūtāni celāni etthāti ukkacelā, nagaraṃ. Sabbā gaṅgā pākaṭā hutvā paññāyatīti pakaticakkhussa pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhāti, dibbacakkhussa pana samantacakkhussa vā yattha katthaci nisinnassapi bhagavato pākaṭā hutvā paññāyateva. Sotthīti anupaddavo. Vaḍḍhīti aparihāni. Ārogyanti arogatā ābādhābhāvo.
摩揭陀国是他的住处,所以叫摩揭陀人,也就是摩揭陀国人。说到“慧”,并没有所谓坏的本性,因为它是完全无可指责的,所以这里的“du-”这个词头表示“没有”,就像“恶戒”等词里的用法一样;而“jāti-”这个词表示自性,因此说“无慧自性者”。“-”这个词表示开始,所以说“patāresī”意思是开始渡,因为牛群还没到达对岸。“善毗提诃人”:就是美好的毗提诃人。据说毗提诃人国因为地势景观的殊胜和森林的优美等,是美好的。作了旋转之后:就是卷入漩涡,以圆形旋转之后。连几头牛也没剩下,因为被河流冲走了,所以说“没有增长,走向毁灭”。因为即使在剩下的几头牛中,牛群也会逐渐增长。休息处:就是消除疲劳的地方。渡口塌了:因为无法抓住,所以没到达渡口。所谓无病:就是连一根毛也没剩下,所有牛都在河流中消失的意思。巴利
Magadho janapado nivāso etassāti māgadho, māgadhova māgadhiko. Paññāya nāma duṭṭhubhāvo natthi ekantānavajjatāya, tasmā du-saddo abhāvavācī ‘‘dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya, jāti-saddo ca sabhāvatthoti āha ‘‘nippaññasabhāvo’’ti. -Saddo ārambhatthoti āha ‘‘patāresīti tāretuṃ ārabhī’’ti paratīraṃ gāvīnaṃ appattattā. Suvidehānanti sundaravidehānaṃ. Videharaṭṭhaṃ kira bhūmibhāgadassanasampattiyā ca vanarāmaṇeyyakādinā ca sundaraṃ. Āmaṇḍalikaṃ karitvāti āvatte patitā temaṇḍalākārena paribbhamitvā. Katipayāpi gāviyo asesetvā nadīsotena vūḷhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘avaḍḍhiṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti. Katipayāsupi hi avasiṭṭhāsu gāvīsu anukkamenapi siyā gogaṇassa vaḍḍhīti. Vissamaṭṭhānanti parissamavinodanaṭṭhānaṃ. Titthā bhaṭṭhāti gahetuṃ asamatthatāya titthaṃ appattā. Arogo nāma nāhosīti lomamattampi asesetvā sabbā gāviyo nadīsote vinaṭṭhāti attho.
对于在这里被世间通称的蕴、处、界,不知道它们的人就被说成“对这个世间不善巧”,所以(义注)说:“对此世间的蕴、界、处不善巧、不熟练。”同样的道理也适用于“对他世间不善巧”这句,所以说:“对他世间也是如此。”魔罗在这里安住,所以叫“魔罗的境界”。这里说的“魔罗”应当理解为烦恼魔。因为诸行蕴是依它运作的方式被执取的,死魔则是另外单独执取的,而正是以烦恼魔的身份,天子魔才能在欲界中拥有统治权。“他们”:指那些对此世间等不善巧的人。为了以最突出的例子来说明他们,所以说:“以此显示了六师外道。”巴利
Yesu khandhāyatanadhātūsu idha lokasamaññā, te ajānantā ‘‘akusalā imassa lokassā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘idhaloke khandhadhātāyatanesu akusalā achekā’’ti. Ayameva nayo ‘‘akusalā parassa lokassā’’ti etthāpīti āha ‘‘paralokepi eseva nayo’’ti. Māro ettha dhīyatīti māradheyyaṃ. Māroti cettha kilesamāro veditabbo. Khandhābhisaṅkhārā hi tassa pavattanabhāvena gahitā, maccumāro visuṃ gahito eva, kilesamāravaseneva ca devaputtamārassa kāmabhave ādhipaccanti. Tesanti ye idhalokādīsu achekā, tesaṃ. Te pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena dassento āha ‘‘iminā cha satthāro dassitā’’ti.
351 “力牛”是指强壮的牛。它们则是已经驯服的公牛和母牛,所以说“已驯服的公牛和母牛”。“未生牛”是指还没有生育过的母牛。“犊”是指小牛犊。这个 ka- 字在这里表示“小”的意思,所以说“幼小的牛犊”。“瘦弱”是指虚弱无力。巴利
351.Balavagāvoti balavante gorūpe. Te pana dammataṃ upagatagoṇā ceva dhenuyo cāti āha ‘‘dantagoṇe ceva dhenuyo cā’’ti . Avijātagāvoti na vijātagāviyo. Vacchaketi khuddakavacche. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Tenāha ‘‘taruṇavacchake’’ti. Kisābalaketi dubbale.
352 “切断魔罗的渴爱之流”:断除了与蕴魔相应的、名为渴爱的烦恼之流。“灭尽三部分而住”:这是针对不来者说的。“所有情况”:指一来者、入流者、第八位的情况。其中,依次有灭尽四道所断烦恼中两部分而住者、灭尽一部分而住者,以及正在灭尽第一部分者。“随法行者”:随念法,或具有随念法的习性,这里“法”特指慧。“随信行者”:随念信,或具有随念信的习性。巴利
352.Mārassa taṇhāsotaṃ chetvāti khandhamārasambandhītaṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ sotaṃ samucchinditvā. Tayo koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitāti anāgāmino sandhāyāha. Sabbavāresūti sakadāgāmisotāpannaaṭṭhamakavāresu. Tattha pana yathākkamaṃ catumaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ dve koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitā, ekakoṭṭhāsaṃ khepetvā ṭhitā, paṭhamaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ khepentoti vattabbaṃ. Dhammaṃ anussaranti, dhammassa vā anussaraṇasīlāti dhammānusārino. Dhammoti cettha paññā adhippetā. Saddhaṃ anussaranti, saddhāya vā anussaraṇasīlāti saddhānusārino.
“知者”这里,因为认知作用的对象没有被特别限定,所以按照语境,指的是没有遗漏任何应知之法的人,因此说“以知一切法者”。又因为缺乏内在实质而高耸,就像芦苇一样,所以叫“慢芦苇”,因此说“已作无慢芦苇”。“希求安稳”这里,因为从四种轭中解脱而不再有灾祸,所以“安稳”指的是阿拉汉果。而这种希求是善法欲的希求,不是渴爱的希求,因此说“以想要去做的善法欲而希求阿拉汉果”。对于证得那个果位,确实没有任何障碍。为了安稳地到达彼岸而开始说法,又以证得安稳来结束说法,所以佛陀正是顺着这样一条连贯的脉络完成了说法。巴利
Jānatāti ettha jānanakiriyāvisayassa avisesitattā adhikāravasena anavasesañeyyavisesā adhippetāti āha ‘‘sabbadhamme jānantenā’’ti. Antosāravirahato abbhuggataṭṭhena ca naḷo viyāti naḷo, mānoti āha ‘‘vigatamānanaḷaṃ kata’’nti. Khemaṃ patthethāti ettha catūhi yogehi anupaddavattā ‘‘khema’’nti arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Patthanā ca chandapatthanā, na taṇhāpatthanāti āha ‘‘kattukamyatāchandena arahattaṃ patthethā’’ti. Pattāyeva nāma tassa pattiyā na koci antarāyo. Sotthinā pāragamanaṃ uddissa desanaṃ ārabhitvā khemappattiyā desanāya pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.
5. 《小萨恰咖经》的注释巴利
5. Cūḷasaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
353 以天鹅圆阵隐蔽:就是被天鹅圆阵遮覆,意思是像天鹅群形成的圆环阵型那样隐蔽。巴利
353.Haṃsavaṭṭakacchannenāti haṃsavaṭṭakapaṭicchannena, haṃsamaṇḍalākārenāti attho.
以此而说,故为论,即道路。他们说什么?更高的。论有百数,即百论。“尼干陀有五百论,尼干陀女有五百论”——尼干陀和尼干陀女就这样各自学了五百论,然后到处游走。他们从行为上发问,但从外在形相就能知道是尼干陀的身份。因此说“我要提出论说”。巴利
Vadanti etenāti vādo, maggo. Kiṃ vadanti? Uttaraṃ. Vādānaṃ satāni vādasatāni. ‘‘Nigaṇṭho pañcavādasatāni, nigaṇṭhī pañcavādasatānī’’ti evaṃ nigaṇṭhoca nigaṇṭhī ca pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahetvā vicarantā. Kiriyato te pucchiṃsu, liṅgato pana nigaṇṭhabhāvo ñāto. Tenāha ‘‘ahaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti.
保持清醒,指的是以打扫等方式保持觉醒。divātaranti 就是太晚(日已高升)。女游行者们问“谁来提问,谁来回答?”时,长老说:“提问本来就该归我们。”提问是论辩的前分。你们热衷于论辩、乐于论辩,高举旗帜四处游走,所以论辩的前分理应归我们;即便如此,因为你们是女人,就把前分让给你们,于是说:“你们是女人,就先问吧。”那些女游行者每人问二百五十论,合计问了一千论。就像用锋利的剑去切断莲花梗,有什么难的?同样,已经证得无碍解、在声闻弟子中智慧第一的法将军,回答凡夫所构想的问题,有什么难的?因此说“长老以剑”等等。其中,“解开结缚”的意思是,让她们再也不能在那里打结;他解开结缚后为她们说法。这位长老就像在具备四支的黑暗中点亮千盏灯一样,对别人无法触及、如同黑暗的问题,刚一被问就立刻解答。那些女游行者看到长老智慧明达,又因为自己是最后有者,无法再安住在矫诈之中,就说:“尊者,我们所知道的就这么多。”长老的领域,就是长老智慧的领域。巴利
Jagganto sammajjanādivasena. Divātaranti atidivaṃ. ‘‘Kassa pucchā, kassa vissajjanaṃ hotū’’ti paribbājikāhi vutte thero āha ‘‘pucchā nāma amhākaṃ pattā’’ti. Pucchā vādānaṃ pubbapakkho, yasmā tumhe vādapasutā vādābhiratā dhajaṃ paggayha vicaratha, tasmā vādānaṃ pubbapakkho amhākaṃ patto, evaṃ santepi tumhākaṃ mātugāmabhāvato pubbapakkhaṃ demāti āha ‘‘tumhe pana mātugāmā nāma paṭhamaṃ pucchathā’’ti. Tā paribbājikā ekekā aḍḍhateyyasatavādamaggaṃ pucchantiyo vādasahassaṃ pucchiṃsu. Yathā nisitassa khaggassa kumudanāḷacchedane kimatthi bhāriyaṃ, evaṃ paṭisambhidāppattassa sāvakesu paññavantānaṃ aggabhāve ṭhitassa dhammasenāpatino puthujjanaparikappitapañhavissajjane kimatthi bhāriyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘thero khaggenā’’tiādi. Tattha nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvāti yathā tā puna tattha jaṭaṃ gaṇṭhiṃ kātuṃ na visahanti, tathā vijaṭetvā kathesi. Ayaṃ thero caturaṅgasamannāgate andhakāre sahassavaṭṭikaṃ dīpento viya aññesaṃ avisaye andhakārabhūte pañhe pucchitamatteyeva vissajjesīti therassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ disvā sayañca antimabhavikatāya kohaññe ṭhātuṃ asakkontiyo ‘‘ettakameva, bhante, mayaṃ jānāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Therassa visayanti therassa paññāvisayaṃ.
她们没有看到边际,也没有看到尽头。因为所说的“一”有很多层含义,所以对于那个问题的意思——如此是边、如此是最终的尽头——她们没有看见,也没有了知。长老观察她们的意乐,看出她们有出家的意愿,就问:“现在你们打算怎么做?”至于“智慧更胜一筹”:凭她们对论道的熟悉和本身的聪慧,她们有这样的智慧,而长老的智慧比她们更高。巴利
Neva antaṃ na koṭiṃ addasaṃsūti ekanti vattabbassa bahubhāvato tassā pucchāya attho evamanto evamavasānakoṭīti na passiṃsu na jāniṃsu. Thero tāsaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ olokento pabbajjāruciṃ disvā āha ‘‘idāni kiṃ karissathā’’ti? Uttaritarapaññoti vādamaggaparicayena medhāvitāya ca yādisā tāsaṃ paññā, tato uttaritarapañño.
论道就是辩论的途径。因此,用各种驳斥他宗等言论,以种种方式讲述辩论途径的人,就叫善辩者。辩才者是指这样宣称的人:我是智者,我是精微者,我是多闻者。他凭星宿运行来预言,也就是依星宿运行的时间知识,说出某日将有月食、某日将有日食等预言,无论说出哪种预言。善得者是因为获得智慧成就而善妙。所举是指他的论辩被举出了宗、因、喻等过失,这就是所举论。当举发过失的论者压倒对方时,对方体内界种也可能紊乱;由于心念散乱,他因那过失而构思的论点便受到震动。柱是指身体被震动。柱其实是血、胆汁、痰的异名,因为它们维持着全身。此外还有一种柱句,是那些执持论道者的一种论述方式。萨恰咖则出于自慢,想凭自己辩才的种种表现震慑他人,所以说:纵使我是一根柱子……等等。声闻的律就是学处,而学处也就是说法,这就是对他的教导。萨恰咖以戒律等门径询问正自觉者的教法与教诫,所以说:那么,尊者阿萨吉,如何……等等。那时,长老心想:名为三相之说的说法,是唯佛陀独有的不共说法。在这里,我以无常之说引起此说,萨恰咖不能忍受,将会以轻蔑之态喋喋不休,带着离车人来到世尊处。那时,世尊将摧破他的论辩,安立无常,说法。那时,他将舍弃论辩,安立于正行。如此思惟后,为显示世尊关于无常、无我相的说法,而说:如是,尊者阿吉韦萨那……等等。巴利
Kathāmaggoti vādamaggo. Tasmā tehi tehi parappavādādīhi bhassaṃ vādamaggaṃ pakārehi vadetīti bhassappavādako. Paṇḍitavādoti ahaṃ paṇḍito nipuṇo bahussutoti evaṃvādī. Yaṃ yaṃ nakkhattācārena ādisatīti nakkhattagatiyā kālañāṇena ‘‘asukadivase candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissatī’’tiādinā yaṃ yaṃ ādesaṃ bhaṇati. Sādhuladdhiko ñāṇasampattiyā sundaro. Āropitoti paṭiññāhetunidassanādidosaṃ upari āropito vādo svāropito. Dosapadaṃ āropentena vādinā paravādimhi abhibhuyya tassa dhātukkhobhopi siyā, cittavikkhepena yena doso tena saṅkappito sampavedhitoti. Thūṇanti sarīraṃ khobhitanti katvā. Thūṇanti hi lohitapittasemhānaṃ adhivacanaṃ sabbaṅgasarīradhāraṇato. Apica thūṇapado nāma atthi kathāmaggo vādamaggaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ. Saccako pana kohaññe ṭhatvā attano vādappabhedavasena pare vimhāpento ‘‘thūṇaṃ cepāha’’ntiādimāha. Sāvakānaṃ vinayaṃ nāma sikkhāpadaṃ, tañca dhammadesanā hotīti esā eva cassa anusāsanīti vinayanādimukhena sammāsambuddhassa mataṃ sāsanaṃ pucchanto saccako ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bho, assajī’’tiādimāha. Athassa thero ‘‘lakkhaṇattayakathā nāma anaññasādhāraṇā buddhāveṇikā dhammadesanā, tatra ca mayā aniccakathāya samuṭṭhāpitāya taṃ asahanto saccako tucchamānena paṭapaṭāyanto kurumāno licchavī gahetvā bhagavato santikaṃ āgamissati, athassa bhagavā vādaṃ madditvā aniccanti patiṭṭhapento dhammaṃ kathessati, tadā bhavissati vijahitavādo sammāpaṭipattiyā patiṭṭhito’’ti cintetvā aniccānattalakkhaṇapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ bhagavato anusāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ, bho, aggivessanā’’tiādimāha.
为什么这里没有取“苦相”呢?于是说“然而长老……”等。为了把“有被责难的机会”这一略说展开,就说了“道果”等。其中“以方便”是指依行苦这一方便来说。“此”指萨恰咖。“这不是你们的教法”:你们所安住的,并不是一切知者的教法,因为不能从苦中出离;相反,这其实是大杀戮之处,又因为被说成大苦,所以叫地狱增盛,也就是增长地狱,因此你们根本没有快乐的希望。“起来又起来”:就是付出努力,让苦不断消磨,完全在受苦中到处游走徘徊。这一切都只是他的邪思而已。为什么呢?因为这里不绕弯子的说法,正是与苦谛相连的。为了遍知苦,才在世尊座下修梵行。道果作为行,依“凡是无常的,那就是苦”这一方便说法,算是苦,并不是在不绕弯子的意义上说是苦。所以说“因此”等。不合听闻,因为是邪说,这就是其意旨。巴利
Kasmā panettha dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ aggahitanti āha ‘‘thero panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Upārambhassa okāso hotī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘maggaphalānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pariyāyenāti saṅkhāradukkhatāpariyāyena. Ayanti saccako. Nayidaṃ tumhākaṃ sāsanaṃ nāmāti yattha tumhe avaṭṭhitā, idaṃ tumhākaṃ sabbaññusāsanaṃ nāma na hoti dukkhato anissaraṇattā, atha kho mahāāghātanaṃ nāmetaṃ, mahādukkhaniddiṭṭhattā pana nirayussado nāma ussadanirayo nāma, tasmā natti nāma tumhākaṃ sukhāsā. Uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāyāti ussukkaṃ katvā, dukkhameva jīrāpentā sabbaso dukkhameva anubhavantā, āhiṇḍatha vicarathāti. Sabbamidaṃ tassa micchāparikappitameva. Kasmā? Dukkhasaccūpasañhitāyeva hettha nippariyāyakathā nāma. Tassa hi pariññatthaṃ bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussati. Maggaphalāni saṅkhārabhāvena ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkha’’nti pariyāyato dukkhaṃ, na nippariyāyato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Sotuṃ ayuttaṃ micchāvādattāti adhippāyo.
354 354. “连同义利教诫的屋”就是指集会堂;王族用来安立议事场所的屋子也叫集会堂,这里的意思就是在那个集会堂里。某一时候,也就是在那样的时候,因为人们在这里商议、处理国王的事务,所以叫集会堂,意思也是在那个集会堂里。“已确立”是指已经认定“无常、无我”。“现在就把背转过去”是指不看世尊的额头,转身以背相对。在酒馆里,就是在酿酒的人家里。“Piṭṭhakilañja”是指放置面粉的席子。“毛”是指滤网。“为了做麻衣”是指用来做麻衣的线等物,就是为了这个目的。这些东西里面有麻皮,所以叫麻皮,也就是麻杆。拿起来捶打、清洗麻,就像游戏一样,比如“打优昙花、打麻”之类。“他成了什么而存在”是指他成了什么样、以什么状态存在?对于世间至高无上的人、正自觉者的言语种植,必须具有比那更高的英勇品质,以夜叉等身份存在,才能胜任。而这个人威力微弱,像毗舍遮的形状,睡了那么久,今天醒来才这样说,这就是其意旨。因此说“什么夜叉”等。巴利
354. Saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāranti sandhāgāraṃ, rājakulānaṃ santhāpanaagārantipi sandhāgāraṃ, tasmiṃ santhāgāreti attho. Ekasmiṃ kāle tādise kāle rājakiccānaṃ santhānamettha vicārentīti sandhāgāraṃ, tasmiṃ santhāgāretipi attho. Patiṭṭhitanti ‘‘aniccaṃ anattā’’ti ca paṭiññātaṃ. Idāneva piṭṭhiṃ parivattentoti bhagavato nalāṭaṃ anoloketvā vimukhabhāvaṃ āpajjanto. Surāghareti surāsampādakagehe. Piṭṭhakilañjanti piṭṭhaṭhapanakiḷañjaṃ. Vālanti caṅgavāraṃ. Sāṇasāṭakakaraṇatthanti sāṇasāṭakaṃ karonti etenāti sāṇasāṭakakaraṇaṃ, suttaṃ, tadatthaṃ. Sāṇavākā etesu santīti sāṇavākā, sāṇadaṇḍā. Te gahetvā sāṇānaṃ dhovanasadisaṃ kīḷitajātaṃ yathā ‘‘uddālapupphabhañjikā, sāṇabhañjikā’’ti ca. Kiṃ so bhavamānoti kīdiso hutvā so bhavamāno, kiṃ honto loke aggapuggalassa sammāsambuddhassa vādāropanaṃ nāma tato uttaritarasūraguṇo eva yakkhādibhāvena so bhavamāno abhisambhuṇeyya. Ayaṃ pana appānubhāvatāya pisācarūpo kiṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ niddāyanto ajja pabujjhitvā evaṃ vadatīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘kiṃ yakkho’’tiādi.
355 在正午时分:指日头当空、太阳运行到天空正中的时候。白天精勤修行的人:指那些白天努力的人,即专心投入修行的人。示现规矩后:指在午饭后前往白天休息处之前,先展示应当做的规矩,然后遵行。示现世尊:为了表达对世尊的恭敬与尊重,把双手做成莲花苞的形状,向上举起,以此示现世尊。巴利
355.Mahāmajjhanhikasamayeti mahati majjhanhikakāle, gaganamajjhe sūriyagatavelāya. Divāpadhānikā padhānānuyuñjakā. Vattaṃ dassetvāti pacchābhattaṃ divāvihārūpagamanato pubbe kātabbavattaṃ dassetvā paṭipajjitvā. Bhagavantaṃ dassentoti bhagavati gāravabahumānaṃ vibhāvento ubho hatthe kamalamakulākāre katvā ukkhippa bhagavantaṃ dassento.
这是针对那个无法计算的数目而说的,所以才说“以广大的离车族众”。难道只用头撞地,就算完成礼敬了吗?“狡诈者”:就是谄曲的人。“开脱”:就是从施食中脱身出去。“就像丢下的泥团一样”:就像往低处扔下的泥团那样。“不论何处”:就是不说适合自己身份的话,随处乱说。巴利
Taṃ sandhāyāti taṃ aparicchinnagaṇanaṃ sandhāya evaṃ ‘‘mahatiyā licchaviparisāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vandanā katā hoti? Kerāṭikāti saṭhā. Mocentāti bhikkhādānato mocentā. Avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍo viyāti heṭṭhākhittamattikāpiṇḍo viya. Yattha katthacīti attano anurūpaṃ vacanaṃ asallapento yattha katthaci.
356 356. “可见这是它的结果”,由它指出、显示出来,所以叫“处”,也就是原因;而那个原因本身因为是它生起的所在,所以也叫“机会”。因此说“某处,也就是某个机会、某个原因”。“机会”就是处所,在“这是无此理、没有机会”这类说法里,原因也被叫作机会。他们不说“当你想问时”,因为他们的允诺涵盖一切法,没有遗漏。“你们”就是你们的。对于夜叉……中略……对于游方者,在这里,“贤者,当你想问时”等提问的话,应当依次对应结合起来。巴利
356. Dissati ‘‘idaṃ imassa phala’’nti apadissati etenāti deso, kāraṇaṃ, tadeva tassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya okāsoti āha ‘‘kañcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ kiñci kāraṇa’’nti. Okāso ṭhānanti ca kāraṇaṃ vuccati ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.161; ma. ni. 3.128-131; a. ni. 1.268-295; vibha. 809). Yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti anavasesadhammavisayattā paṭiññāya. Tumhanti tumhākaṃ. Yakkha…pe… paribbājakānanti ettha ‘‘pucchāvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādīni (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. āḷavakasutta) pucchāvacanāni yathākkamaṃ yojetabbāni.
了知这个世间和他方世间的意乐之后,大士让他们亲眼看见地狱和天界,然后说了这句话。巴利
Ñatvāsayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcāti idaṃ mahāsatto nirayaṃ saggañca tesaṃ paccakkhato dassetvā āha.
我确实会为你讲说,就像善巧者那样——也就是说,我会按照那位极善巧的一切知者所了知、所宣说的方式来讲。但他并不知道其中的道理和没道理,所以他说:国王做也好、不做也好,我反正都会告诉你。巴利
Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathāti yathā pakārena sukusalo sabbaññū jānāti katheti, tathā ahaṃ kathessāmi. Tassa pana kāraṇaṃ akāraṇañca avijānanto rājānaṃ karotu vā mā vā, ahaṃ pana te akkhissāmīti āha ‘‘rājā ca kho…pe… na vā’’ti.
世尊既然只按长老所说的方式来说,那么他在这三转的开示里本来也可以讲苦相。可是在这里,为了堵住这样一种话柄——声闻弟子阿萨吉是另一种说法,沙门乔达摩又是另一种说法——世尊没有触及苦相,只按长老所说的方式讲无常和无我。于是世尊说“色无我……直到识无我”时,萨恰咖不接受,想用譬喻来说明道理。他把自己当作被比喻的对象,就像说“野牛像牛一样”,想靠譬喻这个标准来成立自己的主张,于是说道:“乔达摩尊者,我想到一个譬喻。”意思是:我要为你打个譬喻,靠这个譬喻,这里有些聪明人也能明白所说之话的意思。世尊说:“阿吉韦萨那居士,你尽管说吧。”意思是:你想用一百个譬喻,或者用别的什么标准来成立你那个“我”,都是不可能的,因为连作为能知之补特伽罗的标准本身都找不到。就像“我”在究竟意义上根本找不到、完全不可得一样,能证明它的那个补特伽罗的标准也同样找不到。所以世尊说“放心把你的譬喻拿出来吧”,意思是:你的我论并不能因此站得住脚。巴利
Kathitaniyāmeneva kathentoti teparivaṭṭakathāya dukkhalakkhaṇampesa kathessati, idha pana aññathā sāvakena assajinā kathitaṃ, aññathā samaṇena gotamenāti vacanokāsapariharaṇatthaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ anāmasitvā therena kathitaniyāmeneva aniccānattalakkhaṇameva kathentena bhagavatā – ‘‘rūpaṃ anattā yāva viññāṇaṃ anattā’’ti vutte saccako taṃ asampaṭicchanto upamāya atthañāpane upamāpamāṇaṃ yathā ‘‘go viya gavayo’’ti attānaṃ upameyyaṃ katvā upamāpamāṇena patiṭṭhāpetukāmo āha ‘‘upamā maṃ, bho gotama, paṭibhātī’’ti, upamaṃ te karissāmi, upamāyapidhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṃ ājānantīti adhippāyo. Bhagavā upamāsatena, aññena vāpi pamāṇena tava attā patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na labbhā attano viya pamāṇassapi anupalabbhanatoti āha ‘‘paṭibhātu taṃ aggivessanā’’ti. Yathā hi attā nāma koci paramatthato na upalabbhati ekaṃsena anupaladdhito, evassa ñāpakapuggalaṃ pamāṇampi na upalabbhati. Tenāha ‘‘āhara taṃupamaṃ vissattho’’ti, na tena tava attavādo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti adhippāyo.
在人身中能看到的福与非福,由此被认知为“此人是色”;同样,在人身中能看到的苦乐感受,能看到的对青等色的辨认,能看到的贪染、嗔害等,在人身中能看到的对所缘的识别,由此被认知为“此人是识”。这样,以色等为特征的“我”,就在各处身体中感受善业与恶业的果报——苦与乐。必须这样接受,否则业与果的关联就说不通。为了显示这个道理,论主说了“以此说明什么”等话。其中,“他们”指众生。“依止”就是依靠。先说“此人是色”等,把色等法说成“我”,接着又说“依色而住”等,这位尼犍子其实是在破坏自己的主张,因为他显示出所依与能依没有区别。色等法以受等为自性,就是“我”;由于依止它们,福等行为才可得。在这里,依止什么而福等行为可得,那些被看作众生、以我为自性的色等法就被见到了,就像在天人等中那样;而那些被看作众生、与此不同、不以众生为自性的,则像在木块、树枝等中见到的那样。尼犍子为了以理由证明这个道理,就举出了譬喻,所以说“他极有理由地举出了譬喻”。不过应当知道,他有“种子、草木也有生命”的见解,就像说“应作力之人”那样,所以那些被举为相似例证。如果认为:凡是作为命者的支持、作为与之俱起而应被察知的,才被承认为有生命,而不是仅凭能使之生起就算,那么这样一来,说“应作力之人”时,就是把它作为不相似的例证来举出的。巴利
Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ kāyikaṃ vā puññāpuññaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, tena viññāyati rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggalo, tathā yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ nīlādisañjānanaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ rajjanadussanādi, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇapaṭivijānanaṃ purisapuggale upalabbhati, tena viññāyati viññāṇattāyaṃ purisapuggaloti. Evaṃ rūpādilakkhaṇo attā tattha tattha kāye kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā kammaphalasambandho na yujjeyyāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘iminā kiṃ dīpetī’’tiādimāha. Tattha teti sattā. Patiṭṭhāyāti nissāya. ‘‘Rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggalo’’tiādinā rūpādidhamme ‘‘attā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘rūpe patiṭṭhāyā’’tiādiṃ vadanto ayaṃ nigaṇṭho attano vādaṃ bhindati patiṭṭhānassa, patiṭṭhāyakassa ca abhedadīpanato. Rūpādayo vedanādisabhāvā attā tannissayena puññādikiriyāsamupaladdhito idha yaṃ nissāya puññādikiriyā samupalabbhati, te rūpādayo sattasaññitā attasabhāvā diṭṭhā yathā taṃ devatādīsu, ye pana sattasaññitā tato aññe asattasabhāvā diṭṭhā yathā taṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarādīsūti evaṃ sādhetabbaṃ atthaṃ sahetuṃ katvā dassento nigaṇṭho nidassanaṃ ānesīti āha ‘‘ativiya sakāraṇaṃ katvā upamaṃ āharī’’ti. Tassa pana ‘‘balakaraṇīyā’’ti vuttapurisappayogā viya bījagāmabhūtagāmāpi sajīvā evāti laddhīti te sadisūdāharaṇabhāvena vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sace pana ye jīvassa ādhāraṇabhāvena sahitena pavattetabbabhāvena sallakkhetabbā, te sajīvāti icchitā, na kevalena pavattetabbabhāvena. Evaṃ sati ‘‘balakaraṇīyā kammantā’’ti vadantena visadisūdāharaṇabhāvena upanītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
真正有能力摧毁“我论”、并安立“无我”的人并不存在,因为这是善逝独有的特质。不过,现在那些佛教弟子们各自随自己的能力做这两件事,是站在诸佛所给的轨道上,随顺他们的教导方式而做的。“令退转”的意思是移除、分离。“整个毗舍离”是以依止关系的说法,指称所有依附而住在毗舍离的人,就像说“村庄来了”一样。“聚集”的意思是集合、收拢到一处。巴利
Samattho nāma natthi attavādabhañjanassa anattatāpatiṭṭhāpanassa ca sugatāveṇikattā. Yaṃ panetarahi sāsanikā yathāsatti tadubhayaṃ karonti, taṃ buddhehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tesaṃ desanānusārato. Nivattetvāti nīharitvā, visuṃ katvāti attho. Sakalaṃ vesālinti sabbavesālivāsinaṃ janaṃ nissayūpacārena nissitaṃ vadati yathā ‘‘gāmo āgato’’ti. Saṃvaṭṭitvāti sampiṇḍitvā, ekajjhaṃ gahetvāti attho.
357 “令确立”的意思是:让他作出承诺,使他不再轻视那个主张,也就是不否定它。“杀”这个词本身有伤害的意思。有些声论师从它引出“tāya”这个词,想成立“能杀者”这个语形,所以说“应杀”。“应令生”等说法也是同样的道理。“亦堪转起”里的“ma”是连音字。世尊不说“转起”,而说“亦堪转起”,是用第二个词特别点明它的含义。巴利
357.Patiṭṭhapetvāti yathā taṃ vādaṃ na avajānāti, evaṃ paṭiññaṃ kāretvāti attho. Ghāti-saddo hiṃsanattho, tato ca saddavidū arahatthaṃ tāya-saddaṃ uppādetvā ghātetāyanti rūpasiddhiṃ icchantīti āha ‘‘ghātāraha’’nti. Jāpetāyantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Vattituñca marahatīti ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Visesetvā dīpetīti ‘‘vattati’’icceva avatvā ‘‘vattituñca marahatī’’ti dutiyena padena bhagavatā vuttaṃ visesetvā dīpeti.
“庄严”是指具备可爱的形色,一切肢体都圆满。“因此善加装饰”就是指一切时候都好好打扮的样子。“如是”是指为了说明前面所说的那种情况,用“丑陋”等话来显示它。“在此处”是指在“你对该色有主宰力”这个理由的把握上。因为世尊正是抓住了这个理由:“有主宰力……乃至令它不要如此”。由此显示色是无我的,因为它不能随自己的意愿自在支配。凡是不能随意愿自在支配的,就被看作是无我的,就像资具等一样。“论”是指他将要以过失和责难加给对方。头破七分:在与如来进行如法对论时,被问而不回答,因此造成恼害,到第三次时,那个恼害者就会依法则头破七分,就像那个面对世尊、自称一切智者的人一样。那么金刚手为什么站在那里呢?他像世尊一样怀着悲悯,化出巨大恐怖的形象,想让他恐惧,从而放弃这个邪见,所以在他前方的虚空中持着金刚杵站立,并不是想要破他的头。因为在世尊面前,对任何人都不曾有过不幸。而注释书里只说“被问”,是因为世尊一向只问如法的问题。巴利
Pāsādikaṃ abhirūpanti abhimatarūpasampannaṃ sabbāvayavaṃ. Tato eva susajjitaṃ sabbakālaṃ suṭṭhu sajjitākārameva. Evaṃvidhanti yādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ dasseti ‘‘dubbaṇṇa’’ntiādinā. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti ‘‘vattati te tasmiṃ rūpe vaso’’ti etasmiṃ kāraṇaggahaṇe. Kāraṇañhetaṃ bhagavatā gahitaṃ ‘‘vattati…pe… mā ahosī’’ti. Tenetaṃ dasseti rūpaṃ anattā avasavattanato, yañhi vase na vattati, taṃ anattakameva diṭṭhaṃ yathā taṃ sampatti. Vādanti dosaṃ niggahaṃ āropessati. Sattadhā muddhā phalatīti sahadhammikasākacchāhi tathāgate, pucchante abyākaraṇena vihesāya kayiramānattā tatiye vāre dhammatāvasena vihesakassa sattadhā muddhā phalati yathā taṃ sabbaññupaṭiññāya bhagavato sammukhabhāvūpagamane. Vajirapāṇi pana kasmā ṭhito hotīti? Bhagavā viya anukampamāno mahantaṃ bhayānakaṃ rūpaṃ māpetvā tāsetvā imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ vissajjāpemīti tassa purato ākāse vajiraṃ āharanto tiṭṭhati, na muddhaṃ phāletukāmo. Na hi bhagavato purato kassaci anattho nāma hoti. Yasmā pana bhagavā ekaṃsato sahadhammikameva pañhaṃ pucchati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pucchite’’icceva vuttaṃ.
“燃烧的”就是指正在燃烧。“眼、鼻等”里的“等”字,把像羊头一样的须发之类也都包括进去了。说完“是为了让他舍弃邪见”之后,为了表明这次来并不是随自己的意愿,而是从一开始就把大梵天王放在前面、凭自己先前许下的承诺才来的,所以接着说了“而且”等话。“它”指的是金刚手。那是萨恰咖因为自己的承诺而转变的原因。“是否还有其他人呢”这类话,是在显示萨恰咖试探对方的心态。因为如果不先试探,一看到金刚手就可能说“大夜叉”,那样对他就不合适了。而萨恰咖则观察到别人都不害怕,于是判断:“他们肯定没看见夜叉,所以只有我生起了恐惧。”然后他就依照适当的方式去做了。巴利
Ādittanti dippamānaṃ. Akkhināsādīnīti ādi-saddena eḷakasīsasadisakesamassuādīnaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Diṭṭhivissajjāpanattha’’nti vatvā nayidaṃ yadicchāvasena āgamanaṃ, atha kho ādito mahābrahmānaṃ purato katvā attanā katapaṭiññāvasenāti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Nti vajirapāṇiṃ. Taṃ saccakassa paṭiññāya parivattanakāraṇaṃ. Aññepi nu khotiādi saccakassa vīmaṃsakabhāvadassanaṃ. Avīmaṃsakena hi taṃ disvā mahāyakkhoti vadeyya, tenassa asāruppaṃ siyā, ayaṃ pana aññesaṃ abhītabhāvaṃ upadhāretvā ‘‘addhāme yakkhaṃ na passanti, tasmā mayhameva bhayaṃ uppanna’’nti tīretvā yuttappattavasena paṭipajji.
358 358. “思察后”,是指对所应记说的义理仔细辨认。“同样之理”,意思是:对于行和识,也如同对于想一样,遵循同样的道理。“依所说的相反之理”,应知的义理是:“愿不善的苦受不要生起,愿与忧俱行的不善之想不要生起”等等。“蛇咬之毒”,是指落在一切众生被蛇咬处——身体部位的毒。“已附着”,是指已紧密黏着。“已接近”,是指并未远离。“已吞下”,是指吞下后安住不动。“遍知”,是指从四面八方、毫无遗漏地完全了知。“遍尽”,是指为了使其未来不再生起,而以一切方式将其完全灭尽。而那如是的状态,被称为“引至灭尽、坏灭”,因此说“引至灭尽、坏灭、不再生起”。巴利
358.Upadhāretvāti byākātabbamatthaṃ sallakkhetvā. Eseva nayoti saṅkhāraviññāṇesupi saññāya viya nayoti attho. Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘akusalā dukkhā vedanā mā ahosi, akusalā domanassasampayuttā saññā mā ahosī’’tiādinā nayena attho veditabbo. Sappadaṭṭhavisanti sabbasattānaṃ sappadaṭṭhaṭṭhāne sarīrapadese patitaṃ visaṃ. Allīnoti saṃsiliṭṭho. Upagatoti na apagato. Ajjhositoti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhito. Parito jāneyyāti samantato sabbaso kiñcipi asesetvā jāneyya. Parikkhepetvāti āyatiṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanavasena sabbaso khepetvā. Tathābhūto cassa khayavayaṃ upaneti nāmāti āha ‘‘khayaṃ vayaṃ anuppādaṃ upanetvā’’ti.
359 359. 因为自己的主张没有实质,或者所设想的那种实质根本不存在,所以内里缺乏坚实,就是空洞。显示其过恶:就是从见解和戒行两方面,把他们的邪曲、有过失、有罪过揭露出来。叶薄:就是叶子变得很薄。破裂:就是已经裂开了。巴利
359. Attano vādassa asārabhāvato, yathāparikappitassa vā sārassa abhāvato antosāravirahito ritto. Vippakāranti diṭṭhiyā sīlācārassa ca vasena virūpataṃ sāparādhataṃ sāvajjataṃ tesaṃ upari āropetvā. Sinnapattoti tanukapatto. Viphāritanti viphāḷitaṃ.
习惯于对付没用的树,就是习惯于砍伐紫矿这类没有实心的树。坚硬,是指已经成熟的状态,也就是锐利的意思。并非总是没有,不能说它永远不存在。在大众中,就是在四众集会当中。因此才说“系好腰带,遮住身体”。就像登上压榨机的人一样,意思是说,为了求得记说而像登上压榨机的人那样努力。巴利
Asārakarukkhaparicitoti palāsādiasārarukkhakoṭṭane kataparicayo. Thaddhabhāvanti vipakkabhāvaṃ, tikkhabhāvanti attho. Natthīti sadā natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Parisatīti catuparisamajjhe . Tathā hi ‘‘gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā paṭicchannasarīrā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yantāruḷhassa viyāti byākaraṇatthaṃ vāyamayantaṃ āruḷhassa viya.
360 见的针刺,就是见的荆棘。见的游走,就是见的撞击。见的颤动,就是见的动摇。了知他们的意趣,就是从那些离车族王子们的动摇本身,知道他们内心的意向。因此说了“这些”等话。巴利
360.Diṭṭhivisūkānīti diṭṭhikiñcakāni. Diṭṭhisañcaritānīti diṭṭhitāḷanāni. Diṭṭhivipphanditānīti diṭṭhiiñjitāni. Tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ ñatvāti tesaṃ licchavikumārānaṃ iñjiteneva ajjhāsayaṃ jānitvā. Tenāha ‘‘ime’’tiādi.
361 361. 当一个人证得了这个,他在导师的教法中就无所畏惧,不会被别人动摇。这个智慧就是无所畏者的状态,因此称为“无所畏”,所以说“得无所畏”,意思是“证得智慧”。由此,他不需要别人来让他信受,这就是“不依他”。不需要相信别人有证得,这就是“不仰赖他人”。萨恰咖虽然不知道有学地、无学地这些教内术语,但因为在“看见”这个动作中,说的是还在进行中的状态,所以他知道了“仅仅这样,比丘的职责还没有完成”,于是又发起了“那么,要到什么程度呢?”的提问。因此说“因为说了看见”等等。巴利
361. Yasmiṃ adhigate puggalo satthusāsane visārado hoti parehi asaṃhāriyo, taṃ ñāṇaṃ visāradassa bhāvoti katvā vesārajjanti āha ‘‘vesārajjappattoti ñāṇappatto’’ti. Tato evamassa na paro paccetabbo etassa atthīti aparappaccayo. Na paro pattiyo saddahātabbo etassa atthīti aparappattiyo. Kāmaṃ saccako sekkhabhūmi asekkhabhūmīti idaṃ sāsanavohāraṃ na jānāti. Passatīti pana dassanakiriyāya vippakatabhāvassa vuttattā ‘‘na ettāvatā bhikkhukiccaṃ pariyosita’’nti aññāsi, tasmā puna ‘‘kittāvatā panā’’ti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passatīti vuttattā’’tiādi.
如实看见,就是“见”;因为殊胜,所以是“无上”;这见本身就是无上,所以叫“见无上”;或者说,在种种见之中它最为无上,所以叫“见无上”。这里所说的“世间智”,应当理解为观智。因为它在一切世间智中最为殊胜,所以被称为“无上”。在世间行道无上等说法中,道理也一样。现在为了直接显示这三种无上,所以说“纯粹是出世间”等。虽然一切出世间法都是无上的,但这里以最殊胜的方式来指出:因为再没有比它更高的了,所以以最上道智为“见无上”。因此说“阿拉汉道正见”。“其余道支”,指其余属于阿拉汉道的道支。这些道支已经达到顶点,是导向涅槃的修行道路。“最上果的解脱”,指最上道的果解脱,也就是阿拉汉果。“诸漏已尽者”,指一切漏都已彻底断尽的人。“涅槃之见”,指以最上道正见而现证、通达。其中,“道支”就是八道支。因为一切所知之法都含摄在四谛之中,所以说“四谛是佛陀所觉悟”。世尊正是通过破除随顺四谛的愚痴,而完全断除所知障。“无染着”,指烦恼已灭尽,不再有染着的痕迹。巴利
Yathābhūtaṃ passatīti dassanaṃ, visiṭṭhaṭṭhena anuttariyaṃ, dassanameva anuttariyanti dassanānuttariyaṃ, dassanesu vā anuttariyaṃ dassanānuttariyaṃ. Lokiyapaññāti cettha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā. Sā hi sabbalokiyapaññāhi visiṭṭhaṭṭhena ‘‘anuttarā’’ti vuttā. Lokiyapaṭipadānuttariyesupi eseva nayo. Idāni nippariyāyatova tividhampi anuttariyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘suddhalokuttaramevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satipi sabbesampi lokuttaradhammānaṃ anuttarabhāve ukkaṭṭhaniddesena aggamaggapaññā tato uttaritarassa abhāvato dassanānuttariyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhī’’ti. Sesāni maggaṅgānīti sesāni arahattamaggaṅgāni. Tāni hi matthakappattāni nibbānagāminī paṭipadāti. Aggaphalavimuttīti aggamaggassa phalavimutti arahattaphalaṃ. Khīṇāsavassāti sabbaso khīyamānāsavassa. Nibbānadassananti aggamaggasammādiṭṭhiyā sacchikiriyābhisamayamāha. Tattha maggaṅgānīti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni. Catusaccantogadhattā sabbassa ñeyyadhammassa ‘‘cattāri saccāni buddho’’ti vuttaṃ. Saccānugatasammohaviddhaṃsaneneva hi bhagavato sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇappahānaṃ. Nibbisevanoti niruddhakilesavisevano.
362 “不坏”是指具有不被破坏的性质。“无损害”是指不散乱。“全体”是指没有缺欠。“身支”是说身体本身就是“支”;意思是说,以身体为“支”,也就是头等肢体。同样,“好吧,萨度”这样的话语,只是话语的一部分,所以叫“语支”。巴利
362.Dhaṃsīti anuddhaṃsanasīlā. Anupahatanti avikkhittaṃ. Sakalanti anūnaṃ. Kāyaṅganti kāyameva aṅganti vadanti, kāyasaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṃ sīsādiavayavanti attho. Tathā ‘‘hotu, sādhū’’ti evamidaṃ vācāya avayavo vācaṅganti.
363 “带来”就是运来。“福德”是指被称为福果的那种威力。福果本身也因为省略了后面的词而被称为“福德”——比如在“诸比丘,因为受持善法的缘故,这福德就这样增长”等语句中就是这样。因此说“未来的果报蕴聚”。“福德之大地”,是指广大的福果显现,比如白伞、冠冕、拂尘等。因此说“正是果报蕴聚的随从”。我以离车族派来的嚼食和啖食,供养了沙门乔达摩及其声闻僧团,所以这福德只属于离车族。因此说“愿它带给施主们安乐”。然而,对世尊和比丘僧团的布施其实是萨恰咖给的,不是离车族给的,所以世尊为了让萨恰咖想起这件事,说了“凡此”等话。因此说“世尊如此”等语。“依尼干陀的看法而没有参与”,意思是说,没有萨恰咖的心意,而把那份布施作为福田显示出来。因此说“将自己所供的布施……作了回向”。巴利
363.Āharantīti abhiharanti. Puññanti puññaphalasaṅkhāto ānubhāvo. Puññaphalampi hi uttarapadalopena ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati – ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80). Tenāha ‘‘āyatiṃ vipākakkhandhā’’ti. Puññamahīti mahati puññaphalavibhūti setacchattamakuṭacāmarādi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vipākakkhandhānaṃyeva parivāro’’ti. Licchavīhi pesitena khādanīyabhojanīyena samaṇo gotamo sasāvakasaṅgho mayā parivisito, tasmā licchavīnameva taṃ puññaṃ hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ dāyakānaṃ sukhāya hotū’’ti. Yasmā pana bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca saccakena dānaṃ dinnaṃ, na licchavīhi, tasmā bhagavā saccakassa satiṃ parivattento ‘‘yaṃ kho’’tiādimāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iti bhagavā’’tiādi. Nigaṇṭhassa matena vināyevāti saccakassa cittena vinā eva tassa dakkhiṇaṃ khettagataṃ katvā dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘attano dinnaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ…pe… niyyātesī’’ti.
6. 《大萨恰咖经》的注释巴利
6. Mahāsaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
364 “有一次,世尊住在毗舍离。”这一句,笼统地涵盖了当时世尊在毗舍离、以住所为界的全部时间,包括上午等各个时段;“那时”这句也同样如此。而“上午时分”这句,则特指其中某个时段,也就是为了乞食而作省察的时候。不过,义注中说“用这三句说的是同一个时段”,因为特殊包含在普遍之中。洗脸是发生在先的动作,这一点是通例,所以只说“洗脸后”。确实,洗过脸之后,以修行为职责的人先看清时间,然后照常修习;以教理为职责的人则在几次坐禅中研习教理,然后拿起钵和衣,走向经行道。巴利
364.Ekaṃsamayaṃ bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharatīti iminā tadā bhagavato vesāliyaṃ nivāsaparicchinno pubbaṇhādibhedo sabbo samayo sādhāraṇato gahito, tathā tena kho pana samayenāti ca iminā. Pubbaṇhasamayanti pana iminā tabbiseso, yo bhikkhācāratthāya paccavekkhaṇakālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tīhi padehi ekova samayo vutto’’ti vuttaṃ visesassa sāmaññantogadhattā. Mukhadhovanassa pubbakālakiriyābhāvasāmaññato vuttaṃ ‘‘mukhaṃ dhovitvā’’ti. Mukhaṃ dhovitvā eva hi vāsadhuro ce, velaṃ sallakkhetvā yathāciṇṇaṃ bhāvanānuyogaṃ, ganthadhuro ce, ganthaparicaye katipaye nisajjavāre anuyuñjitvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vitakkamāḷaṃ upagacchati.
原因是合适、相称,意思就是相配。先前没有问已经想好的问题,却去问别的问题,就像放着正道不走,反而从邪路上绕过去一样,所以说“先旁绕而行”。巴利
Kāraṇaṃ yuttaṃ, anucchavikanti attho. Pubbe yathācintitaṃ pañhaṃ apucchitvā aññaṃ pucchanto maggaṃ ṭhapetvā ummaggato parivattento viya hotīti āha ‘‘passena tāva pariharanto’’ti.
365 “大腿僵直”也会出现。这里“名”这个词是表示惊讶的意思,所以说“以惊讶之义”等等。就像“盲人竟然会登山”这类说法一样,因为和表示惊讶的词连在一起,所以“将会出现”用的是将来时。“随属于身”,就是跟随身体、与身体相关的。“这个身体确实具有这样的性质、会变成这样、无法超越这样”等等,通过这种方式观察身体的不净、无常等,这叫作身修习,所以说“而身修习指的是观”。把表示将来的词用在还不存在的意义上,这种将来时的用法并不成立;所说的意义也对不上,也就是“大腿僵直将会出现”这句话所表达的意思对不上。“此”,指自我折磨的苦行。“他们的”,指尼干陀们的。巴利
365.Ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatīti ettha nāma-saddo vimhayatthoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vimhayatthavasenā’’tiādi. ‘‘Andho nāma pabbataṃ abhiruhissatī’’tiādīsu viya vimhayavācīsaddayogena hi ‘‘bhavissatī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ. Kāyanvayanti kāyānugataṃ. ‘‘Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.379; ma. ni. 1.112; ma. ni. 3.154) kāyassa asubhāniccāditāya anupassanā kāyabhāvanāti āha ‘‘kāyabhāvanāti pana vipassanā vuccatī’’ti. Anāgatarūpanti abhīte atthe anāgatasaddāropanaṃ anāgatappayogo na sameti. Atthopīti ‘‘ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatī’’ti vuttaatthopi na sameti. Ayanti attakilamathānuyogo. Tesanti nigaṇṭhānaṃ.
366 366. 他为了详细展开自己所主张的身修习,把它广而说之,又依姓名分别那些致力于此的人,于是说了“难陀·瓦恰”等话。“有染污苦行者”,是指那些以苦行来染污身体的人。“已生脂肪”,是指因进入肥胖状态而生的脂肪。“舍弃前者”,是指舍弃按时间限定绝食、不食等减损、折磨身体的做法。“身修习也不被了知”,这是一句断定的话:从究竟意义上说,连身修习,你以自己的智慧都不能了知,其余的更不必说了。巴利
366. Attano adhippetakāyabhāvanaṃ vitthārento vitthārato dassento ye taṃ anuyuttā, te nāmagottato vibhāvento ‘‘nando vaccho’’tiādimāha. Kiliṭṭhatapānanti kāyassa kilesanatapānaṃ puggalānaṃ. Jātamedanti medabhāvāpattivasena uppannamedaṃ. Purimaṃ pahāyāti kālaparicchedena anāhāraappāhāratādivasena kāyassa apacinanaṃ khedanaṃ pariccajitvā. Kāyabhāvanāpana na paññāyatīti niyamaṃ paramatthato kāyabhāvanāpi tava ñāṇena na ñāyati, sesatopi na dissati.
367 “然而在此处”这句话,指的是“阿吉韦萨那,你连身修习都还不知道,又怎么能知道心修习呢”这个地方。同样,“你连这样粗重、微弱的身修习都不知道,又怎么能知道寂静、微细的心修习呢”这句释义所在之处也是如此。“这实在不是佛所说的话”——意思是:跟称为身修习的观比起来,心修习是寂静微细的;而观跟作为它基础的禅那比起来,则是粗重而微弱的。这就是这句话的含义。长老说了“这话恐怕不是佛说的”之后,就准备起身离开。这时,玛哈斯瓦长老为了说明“这种观一开始还没有被好好培养,所以并不强有力、不锐利、不明净,因此要按它还稚弱的阶段来理解这个意思”,就引用了“诸比丘,可见”这段经文。其中,“执取”指结生。“舍弃”指死亡。“粗”是因为跟无色法相比,它的状态粗劣,所以叫粗。“身”指由四种相续之色聚集而成的身体。“粗地”是就修习语境作的中性表述,意思是以粗的方式。正因如此,才说“执取也是如此,舍弃也是如此”。巴利
367.Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ‘‘kāyabhāvanampi kho tvaṃ, aggivessana, na aññāsi, kuto pana tvaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasī’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Tathā ‘‘yo tvaṃ evaṃ oḷārikaṃ dubbalaṃ kāyabhāvanaṃ na jānāsi, so tvaṃ kuto santasukhumaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasī’’ti etasmiṃ atthavaṇṇanāṭhāne. Abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ padanti kāyabhāvanāsaññitavipassanāto cittabhāvanā santā, vipassanā pana pādakajjhānato oḷārikā ceva dubbalā cāti ayañca etassa padassa attho. ‘‘Abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ vacanaṃ siyā’’ti vatvā thero pakkamituṃ ārabhati. Atha naṃ mahāsīvatthero ‘‘vipassanā nāmesā na ādito subrūhitā balavatī tikkhā visadā hoti, tasmā taruṇavasenāyamattho veditabbo’’ti dassento ‘‘dissati, bhikkhave’’ti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.62) āhari. Tattha ādānanti paṭisandhi. Nikkhepananti cuti. Oḷārikanti arūpadhammehi duṭṭhullabhāvattā oḷārikaṃ. Kāyanti catusantatirūpasamūhabhūtaṃ kāyaṃ. Oḷārikanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, oḷārikākārenāti attho. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ādānampi nikkhepanampī’’ti.
368 “具有对乐的强贪”,是指对乐受有着极为强烈的贪著,与之融为一体。在《发趣论》中,正是以“未曾说”这句话来遮止的。所谓“因此”,是因为当乐受安住于乐时,苦便不会生起。所谓“如此所说”,即“由乐受之灭,而生起苦受”——这是就乐受已灭尽而言,并非说苦受会无间地立刻生起。“耗尽之后”,是指耗尽善法之后。“执取之后”,是指为自身取得处所。“成为两方”,即“时而是乐受,时而是苦受”,受便依这两方面,次第地遍满、占据那些未修身者、未修心者的心。巴利
368.Sukhasārāgena samannāgatoti sukhavedanāya balavatararāgena samaṅgībhūto. Paṭṭhāne paṭisiddhā avacaneneva. Tasmāti sukhe ṭhite eva dukkhassānuppajjanato. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ, na anantarāva uppajjanato. Khepetvāti kusalāni khepetvā. Gaṇhitvā attano eva okāsaṃ gahetvā. Ubhatopakkhaṃ hutvāti ‘‘kadāci sukhavedanā, kadāci dukkhavedanā’’ti pakkhadvayavasenapi vedanā cittassa pariyādāya hoti yathākkamaṃ abhāvitakāyassa abhāvitacittassa.
369 观是乐的敌对者,意思是:一个以纯观为修行方法的初学者,在把握四大种等阶段,会阻止心向外游荡,只把正念收摄在业处上。那时他得不到可意的身乐,就像牛群被关在拥挤的牛栏里一样,苦恼、挣扎;而且因为所观的对象极为贴近,身体里确实会生起痛苦。因此说观“与苦相近”。所以接着说了“已安立观”等话。在旅途中行走时,指在以把握四大种等方式修习的期间。于彼彼处,即在身体各处。苦已远离,是因为以等至之力镇伏了苦,而那时尚未达到安止定。不少,即广大。乐,指禅那之乐。渗透,指由禅那所生的殊胜色法渗入色身;至于进入名身,就更不必说了。即使是修身至念业处的人,在安坐作意修习之初,也会生起身体的疲劳和内心的损伤;然而因为定不与乐相敌对,又具有柔软润泽的性质,所以不像纯观那样是乐的敌对者,而且它能逐渐镇伏苦,因此说“如定那样”。如定那样,但观并没有这种情况,所以说“观则不然”。因此说,因为观是乐的敌对者,而那是身修习,所以说“已生的乐受不会占据并停留在心上,因为身体已修习”。同样,因为定是苦的敌对者,而那是心修习,所以说“已生的苦受不会占据并停留在心上,因为心已修习”。应当这样连接理解。巴利
369.Vipassanā ca sukhassa paccanīkāti sukkhavipassakassaādikammikassa mahābhūtapariggahādikāle bahi cittacāraṃ nisedhetvā kammaṭṭhāne eva satiṃ saṃharantassa aladdhassādaṃ kāyasukhaṃ na vindati, sambādhe vaje sanniruddho gogaṇo viya vihaññati vipphandati, accāsannahetukañca sarīre dukkhaṃ uppajjateva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhassa āsannā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Addhāne gacchante gacchanteti mahābhūtapariggahādivasena kāle gacchante. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sarīrapadese. Dukkhaṃ dūrāpagataṃ hoti samāpattibalena vikkhambhitattā appanābhāvato. Anappakaṃ vipulaṃ. Sukhanti jhānasukhaṃ . Okkamatīti jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpavasena rūpakāyaṃ anupavisati, nāmakāyokkamane vattabbameva natthi. Kāyapassaddhikammikassapi sammasanabhāvanā paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa kassaci āditova kāyakilamathacittupaghātāpi sambhavanti, samādhissa pana apaccanīkattā siniddhabhāvato ca na sukkhavipassanā viya sukhassa vipaccanīko, anukkamena ca dukkhaṃ vikkhambhetīti āha ‘‘yathā samādhī’’ti. Yathā samādhi, vipassanāya panetaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘na ca tathā vipassanā’’ti. Tena vuttanti yasmā vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, sā ca kāyabhāvanā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassā’’ti. Tathā yasmā samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, so ca cittabhāvanā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassā’’ti yojanā.
370 把功德触碰到了,意思是:不靠任何借口,直接带到跟前。那么,“已生起的乐受会彻底占据我的心并停留”——这种事根本不存在。这就是整句的连缀意思。巴利
370.Guṇe ghaṭṭetvāti apadesena vinā samīpameva netvā. Taṃ vata mama cittaṃ uppannā sukhā vedanā pariyādāya ṭhassatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti yojanā.
371 “怎么会没有呢?”意思是:乐受和苦受都是随着各自的因缘而生起的。“那个含义”,就是指当乐受和苦受生起时,自己的心不会被它们压倒。这里,在《陷阱堆经》中,先说在菩提树下的金刚座上坐着,经文说“就在那里坐下”;而在《大萨恰咖经》中,则说在修苦行、行难行之时坐着,经文说“就在那里坐下”。巴利
371.Kiṃ na bhavissati, sukhāpi dukkhāpi vedanā yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjatevāti attho. Tamatthanti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppattiyā attano cittassa anabhibhavanīyatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ. Tattha tāva pāsarāsisutte bodhipallaṅke nisajjā ‘‘tattheva nisīdi’’nti vuttā. Idha mahāsaccakasutte dukkarakārikāya dukkaracaraṇe nisajjā ‘‘tattheva nisīdi’’nti vuttā.
374 以欲造作,就是依渴爱的方式,这是它的意思。以湿润造作,就是依润泽的方式。以迷醉造作,就是依迷惑的方式,也就是让人放逸。以强烈渴望造作,就是依渴饮之欲的方式。以持续燃烧,就是依贪欲之火持续燃烧的方式。因为这里要表达的是出离轮回,所以这些词其实都是出世间道的同义语。巴利
374.Chandakaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanavasenāti attho. Sinehakaraṇavasenāti sinehanavasena. Mucchākaraṇavasenāti mohanavasena pamādāpādanena. Vipāsākaraṇavasenāti pātukamyatāvasena. Anudahanavasenāti rāgagginā anudahanavasena. Lokuttaramaggavevacanameva vaṭṭanissaraṇassa adhippetattā.
用“执取湿”来说明烦恼还没有被断除的状态,用“执取有湿润”来说明还没有被镇伏的状态,用“投入水中”来说明烦恼正在现行活动的情况,用“优昙跋罗木”来说明有身本身没有坚实性。所谓“即以此方式”,就是按照“湿的优昙跋罗木”等前面所说的方式。“连同妻儿一起出家”,应当理解为和儿子、妻子一起去做游方者的出家。婆罗门出家则有住草棚者、多水者、天鹅、胜天鹅等不同类别。巴利
Allaggahaṇena kilesānaṃ asamucchinnabhāvaṃ dasseti, sasnehaggahaṇena avikkhambhitabhāvaṃ, udake pakkhittabhāvaggahaṇena samudācārāvatthaṃ, udumbarakaṭṭhaggahaṇena attabhāvassa asārakattaṃ. Imināva nayenāti ‘‘allaṃ udumbarakaṭṭha’’ntiādinā vuttanayena. Saputtabhariyapabbajjāyāti puttabhariyehi saddhiṃ kataparibbājakapabbajjāvasena veditabbā. Kuṭīcakabahūdakahaṃsa-paramahaṃsādibhedā brāhmaṇapabbajjā.
376 376. 从任何方面都没有水的湿润,所以叫“无湿润木”。因此说“断绝湿润,没有水”。或者,koḷa 是指干枯的朽木,达到了朽木的状态,就叫“无湿润木”。修行者依靠大精进,是因为他的本性没有被烦恼征服,是因为对治法的修习而具有不湿润性。同样,这里显示了像干枯朽木一样的状态,以及远离水、放在陆地上的情形。“由精勤所致的”:指由严厉调伏烦恼的精进所产生的。“受”:指行道中的受。这里所说的就是苦行道。巴利
376. Kutopi imassa āposineho natthīti koḷāpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘chinnasinehaṃ nirāpa’’nti. Koḷanti vā sukkhakaliṅgaraṃ vuccati, koḷaṃ koḷabhāvaṃ āpannanti koḷāpaṃ. Paṭipannassa upakkamamahattanissitatā pakatiyā kilesehi anabhibhūtatāya. Atintatā paṭipakkhabhāvanāya. Tathā hi sukkhakoḷāpabhāvo, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittabhāvo ca nidassito. Opakkamikāhīti kilesaatiniggaṇhanupakkamappabhavāhi. Vedanāhīti paṭipattivedanāhi. Dukkhā paṭipadā hi idhādhippetā.
377 难道他没有能力吗?这里的意趣是:他行了他人连想都想不到的、极难行的六年难行苦行。其实不管行还是不行,他都有能力,因为成佛的因缘已经圆满。正如一切菩萨在最后一生中,由于法性如此,至少七天必定会有难行苦行;同样,世尊有能力行难行苦行,也确实行了,但他并不是靠这个成佛的,而是靠中道。这样说,是为了通过反显的方式,向包括天人在内的整个世界表明苦行并非通向觉悟的道路;而这位世尊的六年苦行,其实是业报所感得的。正如所说的:巴利
377.Kiṃ pana na samattho, yato evaṃ parehi cintitumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ chabbassāni akāsīti adhippāyo. Katvāpi akatvāpi samatthova kāraṇassa nipphannattā. ‘‘Yathāpi sabbesampi kho bodhisattānaṃ carimabhave antamaso sattāhamattampi dhammatāvasena dukkaracariyā hotiyeva, evaṃ bhagavā samattho dukkaracariyaṃ kātuṃ, evañca naṃ akāsi, na pana tāya buddho jāto, atha kho majjhimāya eva paṭipattiyā’’ti tassā byatirekamukhena sadevakassa lokassa bodhāya amaggabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, imassa pana bhagavato kammavipākavasena chabbassāni dukkaracariyā ahosi. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 那时,我护明对迦叶善逝这样说:
一个剃了光头的人,凭什么能证得菩提?菩提是极其难得的。
因为那个业报,我修了很多难行的苦行。
在优楼频螺的六年之后,我证得了菩提。
我并不是靠这条道证得无上菩提的。
我以邪道去寻找,却被过去世的行为所阻挡。”巴利
‘‘Avacāhaṃ jotipālo, kassapaṃ sugataṃ tadā; Kuto nu bodhi muṇḍassa, bodhi paramadullabhā. Tena kammavipākena, acariṃ dukkaraṃ bahuṃ; Chabbassānuruvelāyaṃ, tato bodhimapāpuṇiṃ. Nāhaṃ etena maggena, pāpuṇiṃ bodhimuttamaṃ; Kumaggena gavesissaṃ, pubbakammena vārito’’ti.
有些人说,他修苦行是为了让人看到苦行并不是觉悟之道。或者说,世间主修苦行是为了展示自己精进成就的圆满。因为他志向崇高已经达到顶点,与他的誓愿相应,对正觉有着极强的希求并达到了极致,为了这个目的,他确实也修了这样的苦行。世间主修苦行,是为了向世间彰显自己精进的威力,心想:“这以后会成为我喜悦和欢愉的源泉。”因此他说了“含天神的世界……”等话。其中,“精进锤炼的功德”是指使精进增长圆满的功德。为了用比喻说明上面所说的含义,说了“在宫殿”等话。“在战斗中有两三次打击”,是指对敌军发起两次或三次攻击。“策励精进”是指与正勤相应的修习精进,或者指一切前行阶段的精进。巴利
Dukkaracariyāya bodhāya amaggabhāvadassanatthaṃ dukkaracariyaṃ akāsīti keci. Atha vā lokanāthassa attano parakkamasampattidassanatthāya dukkaracariyā. Paṇītādhimuttiyā hi paramukkaṃsagatabhāvato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ sambodhiyaṃ tibbachandatāya sikhāppattiyā tadatthaṃ īdisampi nāma dukkaracariyaṃ akāsīti loke attano vīriyānubhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ – ‘‘so ca me pacchā pītisomanassāvaho bhavissatī’’ti lokanātho dukkaracariyaṃ akāsi. Tenāha ‘‘sadevakassa lokassā’’tiādi. Tattha vīriyanimmathanaguṇoti vīriyassa saṃvaḍḍhanasampādanaguṇo. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘pāsāde’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṅgāme dve tayo sampahāreti dvikkhattuṃ tikkhattuṃ vā parasenāya pahārapayoge. Padhānavīriyanti sammappadhānehi āsevanavīriyaṃ, sabbaṃ vā pubbabhāgavīriyaṃ.
上齿是指能压制的牙齿,也就是上面的牙齿,所以说“上齿”。因为它就像杵和臼一样,在咀嚼时尤其能压过对方而发挥作用。以善心,是指由强有力的正思惟所相应的善心。不善心,是指与欲寻等相伴的不善心。不给不善心生起的机会,就是抑制。以逐一遮破的方式驱除,就是遮破。以精进的热力来镇伏,就是烧灼。有忧劳,就是带着烦恼的热恼。以精勤,就是通过精勤,也就是通过能引生身体疲劳的精进力。被刺,就是被刺痛。“sato”是指存在的、实存的(samānassa)。巴利
Abhidantanti abhibhavanadantaṃ, uparidantanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘uparidanta’’nti. So hi itaraṃ musalaṃ viya udukkhalaṃ visesato kassaci khādanakāle abhibhuyya vattati. Kusalacittenāti balavasammāsaṅkappayuttena kusalacittena. Akusalacittanti kāmavitakkādisahitaṃ akusalacittaṃ. Akusalacittassa pavattituṃ appadānaṃ niggaho. Taṃtaṃpaṭikkhepavasena vinodanaṃ abhinippīḷanaṃ. Vīriyatāpena vikkhambhanaṃ abhisantāpanaṃ. Sadarathoti sapariḷāho. Padhānenāti padahanena, kāyassa kilamathuppādakena vīriyenāti attho. Viddhassāti tudassa. Satoti samānassa.
378 “缠头”是指用绳子把头部绑起来,再用小木棍卷绕缠紧。说“阿拉汉们就是这样”,是为了表明:即使变成这样神志不清,他们仍然能安住。因此说“像死尸一样”,意思是就像死尸一样没有感受。从入胎时梦见白象、由婆罗门解梦那时候开始。巴利
378.Sīsaveṭhananti sīsaṃ rajjuyā bandhitvā daṇḍakena parivattakaveṭhanaṃ. Arahanto nāma evarūpā hontīti iminā yathāyaṃ, evaṃ visaññībhūtāpi hutvā viharantīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘matakasadisā’’ti, vedanāppattā viya hontīti attho. Supinappaṭiggahaṇato paṭṭhāyāti paṭisandhiggahaṇe setavāraṇasupinaṃ passitvā brāhmaṇehi byākatakālato paṭṭhāya.
379 由于法身健康,所以称他为“萨度,堪忍的尊者”,这是表示亲爱的称呼。因此说“深切喜爱”等等。“不食”是指这样不吃,把“bh”音换成“j”音来说。因此说“非食”。所谓“不要这样做”,就是“不要像你们说的那样,从毛孔吞进去、吸进去”那样做。为什么?因为我将维持生命,也就是说,我要适量地吃东西来维持生命,就这样受用食物。巴利
379. Dhammasarīrassa arogabhāvena sādhūti marisaniyoti māriso, piyāyanavacanametaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sampiyāyamānā’’tiādi. Ajajjitanti evaṃ abhuñjitaṃ bhakārassa jakārādesaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘abhojana’’nti. Evaṃ mā karitthāti ‘‘lomakūpehi ajjhohāressāma anuppavesessāmā’’ti yathā tumhehi vuttaṃ, evaṃ mā karittha. Kasmā? Yāpessāmahanti ahañca yāvadatthaṃ āhāramattaṃ bhuñjanto yathā yāpessāmi, evaṃ āhāraṃ paṭisevissāmi.
380-81 “仅此为最”意思是:只有这么多算是最高的,再没有比这更强的精勤所生苦受。所谓“少一”,是就国王应取的那把犁之外的其他犁说的。那把犁用黄金装饰,其余的用白银装饰。因此他说“大臣们,少一的八百银犁”。在阿喇拉与郁陀迦处所得的禅那,是还归轮回的,而入出息定则因为属于身至念,又因为是一切菩萨修观的起点,所以被称为“正觉之道”。“为觉悟”是指为了证悟四圣谛,或者为了彻底了知一切所应知之法。随念的识,就是随顺念的识。为了说明这是随顺谁的念,才说了“非此……”等话。巴利
380-81.Etāva paramanti ettakaṃ paramaṃ, na ito paraṃ opakkamikadukkhavedanāvediyanaṃ atthīti attho. Rañño gahetabbanaṅgalato aññāni sandhāya ‘‘ekena ūna’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ suvaṇṇaparikkhataṃ, itarāni rajataparikkhatāni. Tenāha ‘‘amaccā ekenūnaaṭṭhasatarajatanaṅgalānī’’ti. Āḷārudakasamāgame laddhajjhānāni vaṭṭapādakāni, ānāpānasamādhi pana kāyagatāsatipariyāpannattā sabbesañca bodhisattānaṃ vipassanāpādakattā ‘‘bodhāya maggo’’ti vutto. Bujjhanatthāyāti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ, sabbasseva vā ñeyyadhammassa abhisambujjhanāya . Satiyā anussaraṇakaviññāṇaṃ satānusāriviññāṇaṃ. Kassā pana satiyāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nayida’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
382 已现前是指以履行各自职责的方式而现前的侍奉者,因此说“叶屋”等。“多诸资具者”是指致力于资具丰足的人。“已回转”是指先前为了断除对资具的贪著而修行,如今则从那里退转回来,因此说“贪味……中略……已回转”。“以法之决定性”是指以法性而言。为了说明那法性,他说“菩萨的……”等。他们只去了波罗奈,而且在那里也只去了一切诸佛都不舍离的转法轮之处。据说五群比丘在卫塞月半月时离开了。因此他说“他们离开后,菩萨获得了半个月的身远离”。巴利
382.Paccupaṭṭhitāti taṃtaṃvattakaraṇavasena patiupaṭṭhitā upaṭṭhāyakā. Tenāha ‘‘paṇṇasālā’’tiādi. Paccayabāhullikoti paccayānaṃ bāhullāya paṭipanno. Āvattoti pubbe paccayagedhappahānāya paṭipanno, idāni tato paṭinivatto. Tenāha ‘‘rasagiddho…pe… āvatto’’ti. Dhammaniyāmenāti dhammatāya. Tameva dhammataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhisattassā’’tiādimāha. Bārāṇasimeva tatthāpi ca sabbabuddhānaṃ avijahitadhammacakkapavattanaṭṭhānameva agamaṃsu. Pañcavaggiyā kira visākhamāsassa addhamāsiyaṃ gatā. Tenāha ‘‘tesu gatesu aḍḍhamāsaṃ kāyavivekaṃ labhitvā’’ti.
387 针对“确实,乔达摩的弟子们专心投入心的修习而住,不修身修习”这句话,他接着问了一个问题。这段法教就是“我确实证知……”等开示。“不粘著”:因为贪欲和邪见等烦恼已经彻底断除,所以完全不被它们染污。“无污染”是它的另一种说法,意思是没有渴爱之喜贪。“唯所行之内”,指的是称为“所行之内”的果等至的所缘,也就是涅槃。关于巴利经文里说的“先前之定相”,他说“我令沉入”,意思是以果等至定,用极善安置的方式让心正确地沉入其中。“由先作意”,指入定之前已生起的策励作意。“确定了”,指限定入定的时刻。因此他接着说“随喜赞叹之词……从未间断”。为了说明佛陀这样限定时间入定、按所限时间出定而毫无勉强,因为他的自在力已经完全善巧纯熟,所以说了“因为诸佛……”等话。对于领受法的人,在呼吸的间歇之处,如果当时不能完全领会所开示的法,那一刹那的教导就可能落空。然而诸佛绝不会有任何无意义的举动。巴利
387. ‘‘Addhābhoto gotamassa sāvakācittabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, no kāyabhāvana’’nti imaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi’’nti. Imaṃ dhammadesananti ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāha’’ntiādikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ. Asallīno taṇhādiṭṭhikilesānaṃ samucchinnattā tehi sabbaso na litto. Anupalittoti tasseva vevacanaṃ taṇhānandiyā abhāvena. Gocarajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattasaññite phalasamāpattiyā ārammaṇe, nibbāneti attho. Yaṃ sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte’’ti vuttaṃ sannisīdāpemīti phalasamāpattisamādhinā accantasamādānavasena cittaṃ sammadeva nisīdāpemi. Pubbābhogenāti samāpajjanato pubbe pavattaābhogena. Paricchinditvāti samāpajjanakkhaṇaṃ paricchinditvā. Tenāha ‘‘sādhukāra…pe… avicchinneyevā’’ti. Evamassa paricchinnakālasamāpajjanaṃ yathāparicchinnakālaṃ vuṭṭhānañca buddhānaṃ na bhāriyaṃ vasībhāvassa tathāsuppaguṇabhāvatoti dassento āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Dhammasampaṭiggāhakānaṃ assāsavāre vā. Tadā hi desiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ upadhāretuṃ na sakkonti, tasmā tasmiṃ khaṇe desitadesanā niratthakā siyā. Na hi buddhānaṃ niratthakā kiriyā atthi.
“这是令人信受的”:有人听到“就是针对她所说的那番话”等语中所说的极其稀有的事迹后,就说这样的修行只有正自觉者才会有——这是以讥嫌的方式说的,不是就实相而言。因此他说“对导师连一丝净信都没生起”。“身疲劳”是指由于特定条件而造成的色身劳累状态。“有执受”是指与根相连的。“无执受”是指不与根相连的。阳光照射时就绽放,没有阳光时就合拢。有些树如亭提尼迦树等也是如此。它们收拢,是因为作为所依的色法不显现。由于是非色法的状态,五识和唯作识不生起,这种所谓的不显现,就是这里说的“睡眠”。因此他说“由于疲劳,这里把有分流的间断理解为睡眠”。其中“由于疲劳”是限定:只是由于疲劳,不是因为昏沉睡眠。这个限定及其结果需要指明。他这样说,是指身体疲劳,也就是由身体病患所导致的睡眠。但说“世尊没有身体病患”是说不通的,因为经中有“我背部感到疼痛”这样的话。关于“迷惑而住”,这是依处格作出的转述,即他说“称为迷惑而住”;也可以说,它指的是属于迷惑而住范畴的所谓白天昏睡,前后就这样连接起来。巴利
Okappanīyametanti ‘‘tassā eva kathāyā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ ativiya acchariyagataṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ sutvā īdisī paṭipatti sammāsambuddhasseva hotīti upavādavasena vadati, na sabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘satthari pasādamattampi na uppanna’’nti. Kāyadarathoti paccayavisesavasena rūpakāyassa parissamākāro. Upādinnaketi indriyabaddhe. Anupādinnaketi anindriyabaddhe. Vikasanti sūriyarasmisamphassena. Tadabhāvena makulāni honti. Kesañci tintinikādirukkhānaṃ . Patilīyanti nissayarūpadhammaavipphārikatāya. Arūpadhammatāya pañcaviññāṇānañceva kiriyāmayaviññāṇānañca appavattisaññitā avipphārikatā hoti, yattha niddāsamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘darathavasena bhavaṅgasotañca idha niddāti adhippeta’’nti. Tattha darathavasenāti darathavaseneva, na thinamiddhavasenāti avadhāraṇaṃ avadhāraṇaphalañca niddhāretabbaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyāti kāyassa darathasaṅkhātasarīragilānahetukaṃ niddaṃ sandhāya. Sarīragilānañca bhagavato natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.300; ma. ni. 2.22; cūḷava. 345) vacanato. Sammohavihārasminti paccatte etaṃ bhummavacananti āha ‘‘sammohavihāroti vadantī’’ti, sammohavihārasmiṃ vā pariyāpannaṃ etaṃ vadanti, yadidaṃ divā niddokkamananti yojanā.
389 “被引向”是指被引向过失之道、应受谴责的途径。“欢喜”是指满心喜爱。因此他说“以心接受”。“随喜”是指以“萨度,萨度”来称赞教法、赞叹教法。因此他说“也以言语称赞”。“时机到来”是指到了适合出家的时候。巴利
389.Upanītehīti dosamaggaṃ nindāpathaṃ upanītehi. Abhinanditvāti sampiyāyitvā. Tenāha ‘‘cittena sampaṭicchanto’’ti. Anumoditvāti ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti desanāya thomanavasena anumoditvā. Tenāha ‘‘vācāyapi pasaṃsanto’’ti. Sampatte kāleti pabbajjāyogge kāle anuppatte.
把僧团遣散,就是让僧团离开,断除僧团的障碍。戏论指残余的烦恼。为了详细解释有福者受国王尊敬这句话的意义,所以说了在那个时候等。通过转交他人的伍波萨他欲来举行伍波萨他甘马。巴利
Gaṇaṃ vinodetvāti gaṇaṃ apanetvā gaṇapalibodhaṃ chinditvā. Papañcanti avasesakilesaṃ. ‘‘Puññavā rājapūjito’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tasmiñhi kāle’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Chandavāsaharaṇena uposathakammaṃ karonto.
尊者整夜都在讲说佛陀的功德,他为了显示长老的智慧和说法的广博,就问道:“尊者,佛陀的功德就只有这些吗?”意思是说:“尊者,听您这番说法,佛陀的功德好像已经毫无遗漏地讲完了,可实际上它们是无量无边的,除此之外还有更多吗?”他这样说,是想让长老在那里发出狮子吼。因为国王的领土有限,而前面所说的善巧说法又是无价之宝,所以他说:“这是我微薄的供养。”所谓“三百由旬”,是就周围一圈来计算的,而且应当理解为只就人类所能受用的范围而言。巴利
Sakalaṃ rattiṃ buddhaguṇānaṃyeva kathitattā therassa ñāṇaṃ desanāvibhavañca vibhāvento āha ‘‘ettakāva, bhante, buddhaguṇā’’ti. Imāya, bhante, tumhākaṃ dhammakathāya anavasesato buddhaguṇā kathitā viya jāyanti, evaṃ santepi anantāparimeyyāva te, kiṃ ito parepi vijjantevāti theraṃ tattha sīhanādaṃ nadāpetukāmo āha ‘‘udāhu aññepi atthī’’tiādi. Rajjassa padesikattā, yathāvuttasubhāsitassa ca anagghattā vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me duggatapaṇṇākāro’’ti. Tiyojanasatikanti idaṃ parikkhepavasena vuttaṃ, tañca kho manussānaṃ paribhogavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
《小渴爱灭尽经》注释巴利
7. Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
390 在这里,也就是在解释鹿子母讲堂的含义时,现在要说的这一段次第解说。“诸宝珠”这里,因为指的是红莲花色的宝珠,所以他说“以及其他”。由此应当知道,这已经包括了青宝石等宝珠。按青、黄、赤、白、淡红、光耀、杂色这七种颜色来说。巴利
390.Tatrāti tasmiṃ pubbārāmamigāramātupāsādānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ idāni vuccamānā anupubbī kathā. Maṇīnanti ettha padumarāgamaṇīnaṃ adhippetattā āha ‘‘aññehi cā’’ti. Tena indanīlādimaṇīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassarakabaravaṇṇavasena sattavaṇṇehi.
渴爱在这里被彻底灭尽,所以叫“渴爱灭尽”(《增支部注》3.7.61),也就是指在那个当中。说“渴爱灭尽”,是就所缘而说为处格,因此说“以它为所缘之后”。“心解脱性”,就是从一切杂染中得心解脱。所谓后分行道,就是圣谛现观;它是教法行者的行境,应当各自证知。所以说“他问:请简要开示前分行道”。由于不动之法性,它超越了坏灭与衰败而称为边际,所以是“究竟”;而那本身具有不退失的自性,因此是这“究竟”的终极,故称“究竟终极”。因此说“意思是决定究竟、恒常究竟”。因为已证悟的出世间法,其见绝没有退失动摇。远离四轭而究竟地得到安稳者具有这一功德,所以称为“究竟轭安稳者”。因为道与梵行已圆满而住,而那具有不退失的自性,所以是“究竟梵行者”。因此说“意思是常梵行者”。“终结”,就是梵行的终结。巴利
Taṇhā sabbaso khīyanti etthāti taṇhāsaṅkhayo (a. ni. ṭī. 3.7.61), tasmiṃ. Taṇhāsaṅkhayeti ca visaye idaṃ bhummanti āha ‘‘taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti. Vimuttacittatāyāti sabbasaṃkilesehi vimuttacittatāya. Aparabhāgapaṭipadā nāma ariyasaccābhisamayo, sā sāsanacārigocarā paccattaṃ veditabbatoti āha ‘‘pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ saṃkhittena desethāti pucchatī’’ti. Akuppadhammatāya khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītāti accantā, so eva aparihānasabhāvattā accantā niṭṭhā etassāti accantaniṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘ekantaniṭṭho satataniṭṭhoti attho’’ti. Na hi paṭividdhassa lokuttaradhammassa dassanaṃ kuppanaṃ nāma atthi. Accantameva catūhi yogehi khemo etassa atthīti accantayogakkhemī. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā, tassa ca aparihānasabhāvattā accantaṃ brahmacārīti accantabrahmacārī. Tenāha ‘‘niccabrahmacārīti attho’’ti. Pariyosānanti brahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ.
“急速而行”就是匆忙赶路。“善加观察”就是思考,也就是顺着自己先前听闻的导师教说,随念并确定下来。“领受后”就是以决断义理的方式领受之后。系于六门,就是六门者,也就是由它们。巴利
Vegāyatīti turitāyati. Sallakkhesīti cintesi, attanā yathā sutāya satthu desanāya anussaraṇavasena upadhāresi. Anuggaṇhitvāvāti atthavinicchayavasena anuggahetvā eva. Chasu dvāresu niyuttāti chadvārikā, tehi.
五蕴就是五取蕴。这里说“一切法”,是就整个自身来说的,因为这里指的是观照的所缘范围,所以处和界也应该看作属于这个范围。因此世尊说“不足以执取”。不足以执取,就是不适合以“这是我的,这是我的自我”去耽著。就像“足以厌离、足以离染”等语句中那样,alaṃ这个词也有“适合”的意思,所以说“不适合”。“成就”就是存在。虽然第三和第四这两种清净属于证智,但因为它们以有因缘的名色为所见,而且在把握因缘时,由于名色有因缘(名色的无常、苦,以及苦即无我,从义理上说),三相就变得非常明显,所以说“以知遍知而证知无常、苦、无我”。同样,以度遍知,也是把“以无常等性质不足以执取”归结到名色上,而不是归结到证智的资粮法上。因为前者从义理上已经把握了三相,以确定自相为它的作用;后者则是从自性上把三相套到名色上进行思惟。由于只在一个心刹那、只是一次现起,所以是极少量的。为了显示色把握的粗显,而说非色把握。在显示时,因为受很接近,特别是对乐味的贪著,以及心耽著于有味的缘故,所以以帝释天神的受为缘令生起之后来显示。巴利
Pañcakkhandhāti pañcupādānakkhandhā. Sakkāyasabbañhi sandhāya idha ‘‘sabbe dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ vipassanāvisayassa adhippetattā, tasmā āyatanadhātuyopi taggatikā eva daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nālaṃ abhinivesāyā’’ti. Na yuttā abhinivesāya ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti ajjhosānāya. ‘‘Alameva nibbindituṃ alaṃ virajjitu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.272; saṃ. ni. 2.124-125, 128, 134, 143) viya alaṃ-saddo yuttatthopi hotīti āha ‘‘na yuttā’’ti. Sampajjantīti bhavanti. Yadipi ‘‘tatiyā, catutthī’’ti idaṃ visuddhidvayaṃ abhiññāpaññā, tassā pana sappaccayanāmarūpadassanabhāvato, sati ca paccayapariggahe sappaccayattā (nāmarūpassa aniccatā, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, dukkhañca anattāti atthato) lakkhaṇattayaṃ supākaṭameva hotīti āha ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ñātapariññāya abhijānātī’’ti. Tatheva tīraṇapariññāyāti iminā aniccādibhāvena nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti nāmarūpassa upasaṃharati, na abhiññāpaññānaṃ sambhāradhammānaṃ. Purimāya hi atthato āpannalakkhaṇattayaṃ gaṇhāti salakkhaṇasallakkhaṇaparattā tassā, dutiyāya sarūpato tassā lakkhaṇattayāropanavasena sammasanabhāvato. Ekacittakkhaṇikatāya abhinipātamattatāya ca appamattakampi. Rūpapariggahassa oḷārikabhāvato arūpapariggahaṃ dasseti. Dassento ca vedanāya āsannabhāvato, visesato sukhasārāgitāya, bhavassādagadhitamānasatāya ca sakkassa vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dasseti.
以生灭之义,就是以生起后坏灭的生灭自性。无常,就是非恒常。无常相就是无常性、生灭性。因此,因为观五蕴的坏灭、衰灭之智是无常随观,具足彼者就是无常随观者,所以说因此。坏灭离染,就是称为坏灭的离染,是诸行的坏灭。依彼而彻底离诸行染者,那涅槃就是究竟离染。于灭随观者中,就是在灭随观这一句中也如此。指出此即理趣后,以一部分显示它而说灭也有……两种。为了显示在一切漏防护中所说的舍,此处就说为弃舍,而说舍离称为舍遣等。遍舍舍是观。以跃入而专注故,跃入舍是道,因为其他没有彼故。彼是道。以所缘故,即以成就作用而作所缘故。这样,道以外的其他涅槃所缘没有跃入舍,此义便成立。以遍舍与跃入,即以此二因。一切蕴的舍,应视为以断除彼所系属的杂染。心跃入,是就与道相应的心而说。此二者都是舍。具足彼二者,就是具足观者与具足道者。如以无常随观断除常想等语,正如由观而得烦恼的遍舍弃舍,同样,未来由那些烦恼所应生的诸蕴的遍舍弃舍也应说;而跃入弃舍,则应由在道中所得、为决定因的出起随顺观而了知;但在道中,此二者皆属智所行,以非权说而得故。因此说具足彼二者之人等。巴利
Uppādavayaṭṭhenāti udayabbayasabhāvena uppajjitvā nirujjhanena. Aniccāti addhu vā. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ aniccatā udayavayatā. Tasmāti yasmā pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ khayato vayato dassanañāṇaṃ aniccānupassanā, taṃsamaṅgī ca puggalo aniccānupassī , tasmā. Khayavirāgoti khayasaṅkhāto virāgo saṅkhārānaṃ palujjanā. Yaṃ āgamma sabbaso saṅkhārehi virajjanā hoti, taṃ nibbānaṃ accantavirāgo. Nirodhānupassimhipīti nirodhānupassipadepi. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti abhidisitvā taṃ ekadesena vivaranto ‘‘nirodhopi hi…pe… duvidhoyevā’’ti āha. Sabbāsavasaṃvare vuttavossaggova idha ‘‘paṭinissaggo’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘paṭinissaggo vuccati vossaggo’’tiādimāha. Pariccāgavossaggo vipassanā. Pakkhandanavasena appanato pakkhandanavossaggo maggo aññassa tadabhāvato. Soti maggo. Ārammaṇatoti kiccasādhanavasena ārammaṇakaraṇato. Evañhi maggato aññesaṃ nibbānārammaṇānaṃ pakkhandanavossaggābhāvo siddho hoti. Pariccajanena pakkhandanena cāti dvīhipi vā kāraṇehi. Sabbesaṃ khandhānaṃ vossajjanaṃ tappaṭibaddhasaṃkilesappahānena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cittaṃ pakkhandatīti maggasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sandhāyāha. Ubhayampetaṃ vossajjanaṃ. Tadubhayasamaṅgīti vipassanāsamaṅgī maggasamaṅgī ca. ‘‘Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’tiādivacanato (paṭi. ma. 1.52) yathā vipassanāya kilesānaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo labbhati, evaṃ āyatiṃ tehi kilesehi uppādetabbakhandhānampi pariccāgapaṭinissaggo vattabbo, pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo pana magge labbhamānāya ekantakāraṇabhūtāya vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya vasena veditabbo, magge pana tadubhayampi ñāyāgatameva nippariyāyatova labbhamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘tadubhayasamaṅgī puggalo’’tiādi.
有人问的时候,世尊顺着提问者的意乐,针对“在世间不执取任何东西”这句话,说“以渴爱而不执取”,这是从欲取的角度否定执取。或者说,如果以渴爱而不执取,那么以邪见而执取就根本没有立足的余地,所以只说“以渴爱”。不执取,就是不取;或者从邪见执取的角度说,不像执取“常”等那样去执取。总之就是简要地、很快地说,也就是顺着对方的意乐,不展开戏论而说。巴利
Pucchantassa ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘na kiñci loke upādiyatī’’ti ettha kāmupādānavasena upādiyanaṃ paṭikkhipīyatīti āha ‘‘taṇhāvasena na upādiyatī’’ti. Taṇhāvasena vā asati upādiyane diṭṭhivasena upādiyanaṃ anavakāsamevāti ‘‘taṇhāvasena’’icceva vuttaṃ. Na parāmasatīti nādiyati, diṭṭhiparāmāsavasena vā ‘‘nicca’’ntiādinā na parāmasati. Saṃkhitteneva khippaṃ kathesīti tassa ajjhāsayavasena papañcaṃ akatvā kathesi.
391 “正面通达”是指以朝向对象的智慧,正面接触所应了知的对象,如实了知。因此说“了知后”。“随众而令解了”,是指不论大众或小众,都随其根机,恰如其分地令他们理解法义。“不超出范围”,就是不流散、不运作。“不要无意义地前往”,这是依法性而说,不是依导师的内心倾向而说。因为这是导师语声八种特质之一,即“随众有范围”。“有缝隙、有开口之处”,是说连成为缝隙、成为开口的余地也没有,这正是前面所说的世尊音声得以听闻的原因。“因此”,就是依据上述原因。巴利
391.Abhisamāgantvāti abhimukhañāṇena ñeyyaṃ samāgantvā yāthāvato viditvā. Tenāha ‘‘jānitvā’’ti. Yathāparisaviññāpakattāti yathāparisaṃ dhammasampaṭiggāhikāya mahatiyā, appakāya vā parisāya anurūpameva viññāpanato. Pariyantaṃ na niccharatīti na pavattati. Mā niratthakā agamāsīti idaṃ dhammatāvasena vuttaṃ, na satthu ajjhāsayavasena. Ekañhetaṃ satthu vacīghosassa aṭṭhasu aṅgesu, yadidaṃ parisapariyantatā. Chiddavivarokāsoti chiddabhūto, vivarabhūto vā okāsopi natthi, bhagavato saddāsavanakāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Tasmāti yathāvuttakāraṇato.
“有五支”就是指它有五个部分,而“五支”本身就是“具有五支的”。大鼓等乐器也属于皮面乐器,所以特别限定为“在皮面乐器当中”。单面鼓,就是罐鼓、锅鼓、达达拉鼓之类。用皮蒙好之后,再系上弦,就是绷皮又系弦的。因此说“系弦的帕那瓦鼓等”。牛口琴之类也应当看作包括在这里面。“竹等”的“等”字,包括螺贝、角笛之类。“合拍的”指合拍木铙钹、铜钹、石片钹、棍钹等。其中,合拍木铙钹是木制的铙钹;铜钹是金属制的;用石板和铁片演奏的钹,就是石片棍钹。“善加应用”就是正确地应用、具足。因此说“具足的”。以侍奉的方式具足五百种乐器。由于处在被这些乐器侍奉、具足的状态,所以说“成为具足者”是它的同义词。“令遍行”就是四处演奏。那么,演奏什么,又怎样演奏呢?回答说“令其遍行于成就……”。其中,“从那里到那里”是指在每一种演奏处、在各地演奏的人。“移开”就是制止演奏的人。因此说“令他们停止声音”。为了怜悯天神和人们,他就这样前往天神处。这个意思应当通过《天宫事》等来说明。巴利
Pañca aṅgāni etassāti pañcaṅgaṃ, pañcaṅgaṃ eva pañcaṅgikaṃ. Mahatīādi vīṇāvisesopi ātatamevāti ‘‘cammapariyonaddhesū’’ti visesitaṃ. Ekatalaṃ kumbhathūṇadaddarādi. Cammapariyonaddhaṃ hutvā tantibaddhaṃ ātatavitataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tantibaddhapaṇavādī’’ti. Gomukhīādīnampi ettheva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vaṃsādīti ādi-saddena saṅkhasiṅgādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Sammādīti sammatāḷakaṃsatāḷasilāsalākatāḷādi. Tattha sammatāḷaṃ nāma daṇḍamayatāḷaṃ. Kaṃsatāḷaṃ lohamayaṃ. Silāya ayopattena ca vādanatāḷaṃ silāsalākatāḷaṃ. Samappitoti sammā appito upeto. Tenāha ‘‘upagato’’ti. Upaṭṭhānavasena pañcahi tūriyasatehi upeto. Evaṃbhūto ca yasmā tehi upaṭṭhito samannāgato nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaṅgībhūtoti tasseva vevacana’’nti. Paricāretīti parito cāreti. Kāni pana cāreti, kathaṃ vā cāretīti āha ‘‘sampattiṃ…pe… cāretī’’ti. Tattha tato tatoti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vādite tattha tattha ca vādakajane. Apanetvāti vādakajane nisedhetvā. Tenāha ‘‘nissaddāni kārāpetvā’’ti. Devacārikaṃ gacchatiyeva devatānaṃ manussānañca anukampāya. Svāyamattho vimānavatthūhi (vi. va. 1) dīpetabbo.
392 392.“或许因自己的事务”:朋友目犍连,我们或许并非因自己的事务而忙碌。不过,正是因为诸天神——也就是三十三天——的事务,才格外忙碌,这是义理的贯通。有些住在地上的天神,他们的一些事务也必须由帝释天神来裁决,所以说“从大地开始”。“裁决时”:即作出决断之时。为了说明那件事的具体情形,才说了“因为诸天神……”等话。“那些”:指那些天女、天子的侍从。“装饰打扮的制作者”:即负责安排装饰打扮的人。“没有裁决”:因为根本不存在疑惑。巴利
392.Appeva sakena karaṇīyenāti mārisa, moggallāna, mayaṃ sakena karaṇīyena appeva bahukiccāpi na homa. Apica devānaṃyevāti apica kho pana devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyena visesato bahukiccāti atthayojanā. Bhummaṭṭhakadevatānampi keci aṭṭā sakkena vinicchitabbā hontīti āha ‘‘pathavito paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Niyamentoti avadhārento. Taṃ pana karaṇīyaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘devānaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāsanti devadhītudevaputtapādaparicārikānaṃ. Maṇḍanapasādhanakārikāti maṇḍanapasādhanasaṃvidhāyikā. Aṭṭakaraṇaṃ natthi saṃsayasseva abhāvato.
即使是通过听闻、受持等方式已经非常熟悉的义理,在智慧眼看来也完全看不见、不显现,这就是这句话的意思。有些老师,即《摄要》的注释者们。喜悦所生的悚惧,是由喜悦引起的悚惧,而不是内心的恐慌。巴利
Yanti savanuggahaṇādivasena suparicitampi yaṃ atthajātaṃ. Na dissati, paññācakkhuno sabbaso na paṭibhātīti attho. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Somanassasaṃveganti somanassasamuṭṭhānaṃ saṃvegaṃ, na cittasantāsaṃ.
“混战”是指因交战而一起陷落、纠缠在一起。由于这种状态在聚集时形成一团,所以经文说“聚集为一堆”。
“于紧接的有身”:这是把第二个帝释有身,和紧挨在它之前的那个帝释有身,因为同属“帝释有身”而视为同一个来说的;否则就应该说“于第三有身”。因为摩伽有身是从这里算起的第三世。或者也可以说:天众与阿修罗的那场大战,发生在紧接摩伽有身之前的那个有身,所以说“于紧接的有身”。他怀着利益众生的心愿,通过奉事父母等行为,所修的行仪就像菩萨行一样。七个誓愿分,就是七项誓约的内容。巴利
Samupabyūḷhoti yujjhanavasena sahapatito samogāḷho. Evaṃbhūto ca yasmā samūhavasena sampiṇḍito hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sannipatito rāsibhūto’’ti. Anantare attabhāveti idaṃ dutiyaṃ sakkattabhāvaṃ tato anantarātītena sakkattabhāvena sakkattabhāvasāmaññato ekamiva katvā gahaṇavasena vuttaṃ, aññathā ‘‘tatiye attabhāve’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Maghattabhāvo hi ito tatiyoti. Atha vā yasmiṃ attabhāve so devāsurasaṅgāmo ahosi, tassa anantarattā maghattabhāvassa vuttaṃ ‘‘anantare attabhāve’’ti. Sattānaṃ hitesitāya mātāpituupaṭṭhānādinā cariyāhi bodhisattacariyā viyassa cariyā ahosi. Satta vatapadānīti satta vatakoṭṭhāse.
大饮就是大量饮酒。瘤饮就是瘤状的饮酒,意思是极度过量地饮酒。围护着就是环绕保护。栏杆基座就是须弥山边缘的栏杆围栏。在五处就是在五个周边区域,由龙军等安排了守护。巴利
Mahāpānanti mahantaṃ surāpānaṃ. Gaṇḍapānanti gaṇḍasurāpānaṃ, adhimattapānanti attho. Pariharamānāti parivārentā. Vedikāpādāti sinerussa pariyante vedikāparikkhepā. Pañcasu ṭhānesūti pañcasu paribhaṇḍaṭṭhānesu nāgasenādīhi ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi.
393 可爱,是指令人愉悦的状态。摩萨罗宝石柱,就是用杂色宝石做成的柱子。金等所成的罐,则是说按照“银柱上放金罐、金柱上放银罐”这类做法,用金等材质做成的罐,以及上面的猛兽形象。极度沉醉,就是放逸。因此说“极为沉醉”。以戏舞随从,就是以天女作为随从。巴利
393.Rāmaṇeyyakanti ramaṇīyabhāvaṃ. Masāragallatthambheti kabaramaṇimaye thambhe. Suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭaketi ‘‘rajatatthambhesu suvaṇṇamaye, suvaṇṇatthambhesu rajatamaye’’tiādinā suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭake vāḷarūpakāni ca. Pabāḷhaṃ mattoti pamatto. Tenāha ‘‘ativiya matto’’ti. Nāṭakaparivārenāti accharāparivārena.
用“稀有奇特”这两个词,说的只是惊异的表现方式。因此,那些人心内生起了稀有奇特之感,有惊异的表现,所以叫“已生稀有奇特”,同样也是指这样生起的心念。由于稀有奇特之因,那些人生起了满足,所以叫“已生满足”。“悚惧”是指已生起悚惧感。而这种悚惧,因为是对先前状态的内心动摇,所以说为“动摇的”。巴利
Acchariyabbhutanti padadvayenapi vimhayanākārova vutto, tasmā sañjātaṃ acchariyabbhutaṃ vimhayanākāro etesanti sañjātaacchariyaabbhutā, tathā pavattacittuppādā. Acchariyabbhutahetukā sañjātā tuṭṭhi etesanti sañjātatuṭṭhino. Saṃvigganti sañjātasaṃvegaṃ. Svāyaṃ saṃvego yasmā purimāvatthāya cittassa calanaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘calita’’nti.
394 “驱散黑暗”:因为见到神通变化,对正确修行生起“啊,长老的神通威力真是稀有!”这样的高度恭敬;又因为如理作意:“我们虽然得到了这样的教法,却还因毫无意义的财富而沉醉”,所以那愚痴的黑暗就被驱散、被消除了。“这两位”是指大长老和帝释天神,他们因为曾共同修梵行,所以是同梵行者。巴利
394.Tamaṃ vinoditanti pāṭihāriyadassanena ‘‘aho therassa iddhānubhāvo’’ti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ sañjātabahumāno, īdisaṃ nāma sāsanaṃ labhitvāpi mayaṃ niratthakena bhogamadena sammattā bhavāmāti yoniso manasikāruppādanena sammohatamaṃ vinoditaṃ vidhamitaṃ. Eteti mahāthero sakko cāti te dvepi samānabrahmacariyatāya sabrahmacārino.
395 “众所周知的”是指四大天王天、善夜摩天子天、兜率天、他化自在天和大梵天王这些天众当中某一位明显为人所知的,而不是指任何随便哪一位不知名的天神,这是这句话的意思。因为借着已经发起的法之力而得以究竟完成,所以就按照相应的关联方式作了总结。巴利
395.Paññātānanti pākaṭānaṃ cātumahārāja-suyāma-santusita-paranimmitavasavattimahābrahmānaṃ aññataro, na yesaṃ kesañcīti adhippāyo. Āraddhadhammavaseneva pariyosāpitattā yathānusandhināva niṭṭhapesi.
《大渴爱灭尽经》的注释巴利
8. Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
396 “只是执取见解”是指错误执取本身,并不是对某种见的固执。“常见”是指对恒常的固执。“他”就是阿利塔比丘。“讲说后归结”是句法上的连接关系;“归结”的意思是得出结论。“就在那些各处”是说:识在各自所在的生命形态中便灭去,不会转移到另一个生命形态。不过这里要表达的是:识的本性并没有分裂,也不是另一个东西。“从此世”是指从这一有身。“到他世”是指到被称为后世的有身。“流转”是说:由于被执为恒常,它就像不受任何东西系缚一样地前往。因此,他以此表达了从此世到他世的移动。“轮回”则以此表达了他世再回到此世的移动。或者,“流转”说的是有身与有身之间的转移,“轮回”说的是在那里这里不断来回游转。巴利
396.Laddhimattanti micchāgāhamattaṃ, na diṭṭhābhiniveso. Sassatadiṭṭhīti niccābhiniveso. Soti ariṭṭho bhikkhu. Kathetvā samodhānentanti yojanā. Samodhānentanti ca nigamentanti attho. Tattha tatthevāti tesu tesu eva bhavesu nirujjhanti, na bhavantaraṃ saṅkamanti. Viññāṇaṃ pana abhinnasabhāvaṃ anaññanti adhippāyo. Idhalokatoti imasmā attabhāvā. Paralokanti parabhavasaññitaṃ attabhāvaṃ. Sandhāvatīti niccatāya kenaci asambaddhaṃ viya gacchati. Tena idhalokato paralokagamanamāha. Saṃsaratīti iminā paralokato idhāgamanaṃ. Sandhāvatīti vā bhavantarasaṅkamanamāha. Saṃsaratīti tattha tattha aparāparasañcaraṇaṃ.
他以“有缘时则有”等说法,从随顺和背离两个角度说明识是缘起的,因此否定识是常住的。说“他说了佛陀没有说过的话”,是为了指出:在“破僧事”这一类事情上,他把如来没有说过、没有讲过的东西,说成是如来所说、所讲。“打击胜者的法轮”是说:当他承认“就是这个识……不是别的”是常住的,就对导师所转起的、讲“诸行无常”“比丘们,色是无常”等法的法轮,像钉入一根木桩一样加以打击。他把一切知智所见、所宣说的无常之识,说成是常住的,这就是在抗拒如来的自信智。他用执取常见的方式,欺骗了那些想听闻观道的人——观道是证得圣法唯一的方法。正因如此,他排斥观道,就偏离了圣道、圣法的大道。巴利
‘‘Paccaye sati bhavatī’’tiādinā viññāṇassa anvayato byatirekato ca paṭiccasamuppannabhāvaṃ dassento sassatabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Buddhena akathitaṃ kathesīti iminā ‘‘yaṃ abhāsitaṃ alapitaṃ tathāgatena, taṃ bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ tathāgatenāti dīpetī’’ti (cūḷava. 352, 353) imasmiṃ bhedakaravatthusmiṃ sandissatīti dasseti. Jinacakke pahāraṃ detīti ‘‘tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ…pe… anañña’’nti niccataṃ paṭijānanto – ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā (dha. pa. 277), rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anicca’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.93-94) ca ādinayappavatte satthu dhammacakke khīlaṃ uppādento pahāraṃ deti. Sabbaññutaññāṇena aniccanti diṭṭhaṃ paveditañca viññāṇaṃ niccanti paṭijānanto vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhati. Sotukāmaṃ jananti ariyadhammādhigamassa ekantaupāyabhūtaṃ vipassanāmaggaṃ sotukāmaṃ janaṃ niccaggāhapaggaṇhanena visaṃvādeti. Tato eva ariyapathe ariyadhammavīthiyaṃ tassā paṭikkhipanena tiriyaṃ nipatitvā.
398 他以识作为切入点,开显自己所执取的那个“我”,于是说了“尊者,凡是这个……”等话。其中,“能说者”“能觉者”这一类说法,正是常见执着的表现方式。“他说”,就是“能说者”,意思是语业的造作者。他借此显示:自己有能力让那些执着于有造作者的有情觉悟到利益与安乐。“能觉者”就是“唯觉者才觉”,意思是了知、体验。对于这类词,精通语言学的论师们大多认为它们成立为“造作者”这一含义。“他感受”,是指他体验各种应当被体验的对象。“于彼彼处”,是指在各种有、生、趣、住、有情居、众生聚之中。巴利
398. Viññāṇasīsena attanā gahitaṃ attānaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘yvāyaṃ, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tattha vado vedeyyotiādayo sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti attho. Iminā hi kārakabhāvupāyikasattānaṃ hitasukhāvabodhanasamatthataṃ attano dasseti. Vediyova vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti attho. Īdisānañhi padānaṃ bahulā kattusādhanataṃ saddavidū maññanti. Vedayatīti taṃ taṃ anubhavitabbaṃ anubhavati. Tahiṃ tahinti tesu tesu bhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsasattanikāyesu.
399 由于他高举并坚持这种主张,应当知道:萨提的(解脱善法)因缘已被切断,其法已不再增长。“下方”是指《蛇喻经注释》中所说的内容。后面各处提到“下方”的地方,道理也一样。“一个各别的连结”,是指不与三种连结相混、单独成为一个连结。难道这个连结不也是因为萨提的意乐而生起,所以只是意乐连结吗?不是,因为它不是以导向出离的方式生起的。所谓以导向出离为前提,通过发问等方式生起的,是另外那些开示发问连结等。这里因为没有这种导向出离,所以说“一个各别的连结”。“清除大众的邪见”,是指:无论萨提持有什么样的邪见,都通过显示其邪见不成立来清除大众的邪见。正是通过清除大众的邪见,萨提才等于被逐出了僧众。巴利
399. Taṃ vādaṃ paggayha ṭhitattā sātissa chinnapaccayatā aviruḷhadhammatā ca veditabbā. Heṭṭhāti alagaddasuttasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.236-237) sandhāyāha. Parato heṭṭhāti vuttaṭṭhānepi eseva nayo. Pāṭiyekko anusandhīti tīhipi anusandhīhi avomisso visuṃyeveko anusandhi. Nanu cāyampi sātissa ajjhāsayavasena pavattitattā ajjhāsayānusandhiyevāti? Na, niyyānamukhena appavattattā. Niyyānañhi purakkhatvā pucchādivasena pavattā itarā desanāpucchānusandhiādayo. Idha tadabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti. Parisāya laddhiṃ sodhentoti yādisī sātissa laddhi, tadabhāvadassanavasena parisāya laddhiṃ sodhento, parisāya laddhisodhaneneva sāti gaṇato nissārito nāma jāto.
400 “无论任何”这一说法,虽然笼统地说是在指缘法,但由于经中说过“仅被称为识”,所以应当理解为:这里取的是每一种识各自的名称、特征和缘所生。因此经文里说“仅被称为眼识”等等。或者,这里“无论任何”所取的,是每一种识被各自的门所限定、以及其余一切属于各种识的缘所生;而在其中,对于那些不共的部分,就以它们的名称来说“仅被称为眼识”等等。所谓“没有门的迁移”,是指识不会转移到别的门去。这是用粗显的方式,为了让智慧迟钝的人容易理解而展示的理路。因为实际上,现前的识灭去时,绝不会转移到无间识去,原因是如果得不到无间缘等条件,它就不会生起。巴利
400.Yaṃ yadevāti idaṃ yadipi avisesato paccayadhammaggahaṇaṃ, ‘‘viññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’ti pana vuttattā taṃtaṃviññāṇassa samaññānimittapaccayajātaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇantveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī’’tiādi. Atha vā taṃtaṃdvāraniyataṃ itarampi sabbaṃ tassa tassa viññāṇassa paccayajātaṃ idha ‘‘yaṃ yadevā’’ti gahitaṃ, tattha pana yaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ, tena samaññāti ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇantvevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dvārasaṅkantiyā abhāvanti viññāṇassa dvārantarasaṅkamanassa abhāvaṃ. Svāyaṃ oḷārikanayena mandabuddhīnaṃ sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ nayadassanavasena vutto. Na hi kadāci paccuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ vigacchantaṃ anantaraviññāṇaṃ saṅkamati anantarādipaccayālābhe tassa anuppajjanato.
就像火依靠燃料燃烧,一旦没有燃料,就在原地熄灭,不会转移到别的地方去;同样地,这里所说的“由于缘的缺失,就在原地灭尽”,为什么这么说呢?因为这里并不是要讲无生之灭,那种灭在此处并不是所要表达的意思;这里要讲的是刹那灭,而刹那灭是事物本有的性质,并不是以缘的缺失为原因。确实如此。不过,这里所要表达的是:各个门类的识不会转移到别的门去,而是在各自所在之处灭尽。而那些缘——依靠它们才会有跨门类运转的识——由于它们不存在,所以说“缘的缺失”。因此应当这样理解:由于缘的缺失,它不会转移到耳等门去,也不会被称为耳识等等。通过这一点就表明了:依靠眼、色等缘的和合而被称为眼识的识,因为是暂时性的,就在原地灭尽;而由于耳、声等缘不存在,它怎么会有耳识等名称呢?既然它根本不生起,又怎么会有转移呢?“在识的转起中”是指在识生起运转的状态中。“仅仅是门路的转移”的意思是:我连它转移到别的门路都不说,因为它就在原地坏灭,而缘是有生起的;只要有生起,灭就是必然的。这样一来,就以“不存在”这一含义,说明了无常性。巴利
Evamevāti yathā aggi upādānaṃ paṭicca jalanto anupādāno tattheva nibbāyati, na katthaci saṅkamati, evameva. ‘‘Paccayavekallena tattheva nirujjhatī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, na hettha anuppādanirodho icchito tādisassa nirodhassa idha anadhippetattā, atha kho khaṇanirodho, so ca sābhāvikattā na paccayavekallahetuko? Saccametaṃ, taṃtaṃdvārikassa pana viññāṇassa dvārantaraṃ asaṅkamitvā tattha tattheva nirujjhanaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Yesañca paccayānaṃ vasena dvārantarikaviññāṇena bhavitabbaṃ, tesaṃ tadabhāvato paccayavekallaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā paccayavekallena na sotādīni saṅkamitvā sotaviññāṇantiādi saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti yojanā. Etena yaṃ viññāṇaṃ cakkhurūpādipaccayasāmaggiyā vasena cakkhuviññāṇasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tattha tattheva nirujjhati tāvakālikabhāvato, tassa pana sotasaddādipaccayābhāvato kuto sotaviññāṇādisamaññā, evamappavattito tassa kuto saṅkamoti dassitaṃ hoti. Viññāṇappavatteti viññāṇappavattiyaṃ. Dvārasaṅkantimattanti dvārantarasaṅkamanamattampi na vadāmi tattha tattheva bhijjanato paccayassa uppādavantato sati ca uppāde avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccatā dīpitā hotīti.
401 世尊在圣典里说过:“缘所生的识,是我说的;除了缘之外,识没有生起的可能。”这句话从随顺和反面的角度,已经显示了识是有为的。所以注释者说:“显示了它有缘的状态之后。”这里所说的“存在”,是指由因缘所生、已经生起的东西。从究竟意义上说,它就是五蕴,因为离开了这个由五蕴构成的有缘之法,并没有另一个有缘的存在。而那个五蕴整体,无论是对他自己还是对那些比丘们,世尊都称之为“这个存在”。所以说:“这个五蕴整体。”能带来自己果报的,就是食,也就是缘。由它而生起,就是生源;这个存在以食为生源,所以是“以食为生源”。因此说:“以缘为生源。”所谓“那个缘的灭”,是指使五蕴整体得以生起的无明等缘,那些缘不再生起的灭。至于刹那灭,则是不依赖任何原因的。巴利
401. ‘‘Paṭiccasamuppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ mayā, aññatra paccayā natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo’’ti pāḷiyā anvayato ca byatirekato ca viññāṇassa saṅkhatatāva dassitāti āha ‘‘sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetvā’’ti. Hetupaccayehi jātaṃ nibbattaṃ ‘‘bhūta’’nti idhādhippetaṃ, taṃ atthato pañcakkhandhā tabbinimuttassa sappaccayassa abhāvato, yañca khandhapañcakaṃ attano tesañca bhikkhūnaṃ, taṃ ‘‘bhūtamida’’nti bhagavā avocāti āha ‘‘idaṃ khandhapañcaka’’nti. Attano phalaṃ āharatīti āhāro, paccayo. Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavo, āhāro sambhavo etassāti āhārasambhavaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccayasambhava’’nti. Tassa paccayassa nirodhāti yena avijjādinā paccayena khandhapañcakaṃ sambhavati, tassa paccayassa anuppādanirodhā. Khaṇanirodho pana kāraṇanirapekkho.
“难道不是吗”这个词是用来表达疑惑的,所以注释者说:“这是真实的呢,还是不是真实的?”而“这是真实的吧,难道不是吗”这句话,表达的是这样的疑惑:这只是五蕴呢,还是有一个我或我所?应当知道,这样就摄取了这种类型的疑惑心态。而“以食为生源的吧,难道不是吗”这句话,表达的是这样的疑惑:这个真实存在是有因的呢,还是无因的?正如摄取了落入无因状态的疑惑心态,同样也应当看到,摄取了落入不平等因状态的疑惑心态。因为对于不平等因论来说,从究竟意义上讲,所谓真实存在也是无因的。而不平等因论也只是他人臆想出来的而已,所以可以和主张自性决定等说法等同看待。“以灭为法的吧,难道不是吗”这句话,表达的是这样的疑惑:这个真实存在是无常的呢,还是常的?应当看到,同样也摄取了“这是苦呢,还是不苦”、“这是无我呢,还是不是无我”这样的疑惑心态。因为无常的东西必然是苦等,而常的东西则这两者都不存在。“以如实的自体和共相”,就是从不错乱的自体和共相,也就是从作用和自性来说。作为观的基础的慧本身就是观,所以说“观慧”。从自体来说,就是从自性来说;从共相来说,就是从普遍特征来说。因此说“以观慧正确地看着”。按照所说的方式,就是按照“以如实的自体和共相”所说的方式。那些,就是指在那个集会中的那些比丘们。他们清楚地观察,就是正确地把握。巴利
Nossūti saṃsayajotano nipātoti āha ‘‘bhūtaṃ nu kho idaṃ, na nu kho bhūta’’nti. Bhūtamidaṃ nossūti ca iminā khandhapañcakameva nu kho idaṃ, udāhu attattaniyanti evaṃjātiko saṃsayanākāro gahito. Tadāhārasambhavaṃ nossūti pana iminā sahetukaṃ nu kho idaṃ bhūtaṃ, udāhu ahetukanti yathā ahetukabhāvāpanno saṃsayanākāro gahito, evaṃ visamahetukabhāvāpannopi saṃsayanākāro gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visamahetunopi paramatthato bhūtassa ahetukabhāvato. Visamahetuvādopi parehi parikappitamattatāya sabhāvaniyatiyadicchādivādehi samānayogakkhamoti. Nirodhadhammaṃ nossūti iminā yathā aniccaṃ nu kho idaṃ bhūtaṃ, udāhu niccanti aniccataṃ paṭicca saṃsayanākāro gahito, evaṃ dukkhaṃ nu kho, udāhu na dukkhaṃ, anattā nu kho, udāhu na anattātipi saṃsayanākāro gahitoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ aniccassa dukkhabhāvādiavassaṃbhāvato, nicce ca tadubhayābhāvato. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti aviparītasarasato salakkhaṇato ca, kiccato ceva sabhāvato cāti attho. Vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānabhūtāpi paññā vipassanā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti. Sarasatoti ca sabhāvato. Salakkhaṇatoti sāmaññalakkhaṇato. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpaññāya sammā passantassā’’ti. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato’’ti vuttanayeneva. Ye yeti tassaṃ parisāyaṃ ye ye bhikkhū. Sallakkhesunti sammadeva upadhāresuṃ.
“Tehi”指的是那些比丘。“Tattha”指的是在那观慧当中。“Nittaṇhabhāva”(无渴爱状态)指的是渴爱的消失,也就是“这是我的”这种渴爱执取已被断除。世尊也借此斥责萨提:“比丘们,我对诸法也是称赞断除渴爱的;然而这个愚人萨提却还在有身之中,抱着那套增长渴爱的颠倒见,紧抓不放。”
“Sabhāvadassanena”(以见自性)指的是以不颠倒的方式观见诸法的自性。“Paccayadassanena”(以见缘)指的是观察因,即毫无遗漏地观察因与缘。“Allīyetha”(会依止)指的是依止于渴爱与邪见而执取。“Kelāyetha”(会珍爱)指的是以呵护、取乐的方式执持。“Dhanaṃ viya icchantā”(如同渴望财富)指的是如同对财富、物质生起贪欲、渴爱那样。“Mamattaṃ uppādeyyāthā”(生起我所执)指的是通过渴爱与邪见,生起“这是我的”。“Nikantivasenapi gahaṇatthāya no desito”并非为了以爱欲之力执取而说;或者说,执取那微细的观法,只能是以爱欲之力,而非以粗重的渴爱,因此说“以爱欲之力”。巴利
Tehīti tehi bhikkhūhi. Tatthāti tissaṃ vipassanāpaññāyaṃ. Nittaṇhabhāvanti taṇhābhāvaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama’’nti taṇhāggāhassa pahīnataṃ. Etenapi bhagavā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammesupi taṇhāpahānameva vaṇṇemi, sāti pana moghapuriso attabhāvepi taṇhāsaṃvaddhaniṃ viparītadiṭṭhiṃ paggayha tiṭṭhatī’’ti sātiṃ niggaṇhāti. Sabhāvadassanenāti dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvadassanena. Paccayadassanenāti kāraṇadassanena anavasesato hetuno paccayassa ca dassanena. Allīyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena nissayetha. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhīhī’’ti. Kelāyethāti pariharaṇakeḷiyā parihareyyātha. Tenāha ‘‘kīḷamānā vihareyyāthā’’ti. Dhanaṃ viya icchantāti dhanaṃ viya drabyaṃ viya icchaṃ taṇhaṃ janentā. Tenāha ‘‘gedhaṃ āpajjeyyāthā’’ti. Mamattaṃ uppādeyyāthāti ‘‘mamamida’’nti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinivesaṃ janeyyātha. Nikantivasenapi gahaṇatthāya no desito, tassa vā saṇhasukhumassa vipassanādhammassa gahaṇaṃ nāma nikantiyā eva siyā, na oḷārikataṇhāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nikantivasenā’’ti.
402 402. 因为依于这个而生起果,所以称为缘,也就是一切特殊的因。因此注释师说:“开示诸蕴的缘。”实际上,直到无明为止,诸蕴的一切特殊因在这里都已经开示了。接着,从开头到结尾,再从结尾到开头,也就是顺着和逆着,以观察轮回与还灭的方式,从各种不同的理路开示了缘起;由此说明:在这里,作为执取为常的因相的烦恼也是不存在的。所谓“那也属于已说之义”,是指从“比丘们,这四种食”一直到“以渴爱为集起”这段经文,其义在《正见经》的注释中已经说过了。其余部分,因为不是缘起论的内容,在《清净道论》中有详细阐述,所以就用这前面所说的概括含摄了。巴利
402. Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ etīti paccayo, sabbo kāraṇavisesoti āha ‘‘khandhānaṃ paccayaṃ dassento’’ti. Yāva avijjā hi sabbo nesaṃ kāraṇaviseso idha dassito. Puna ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā, antato paṭṭhāya yāva ādīti anulomato paṭilomato ca vaṭṭavivaṭṭadassanavasena nānānayehi paṭiccasamuppādo dassito, niccaggāhassa nimittabhūto kilesopi idha natthīti dīpeti. Tampi vuttatthamevāti tampi ‘‘ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro āhārā’’tiādi yāva ‘‘taṇhāpabhavā’’ti pāḷipadaṃ, tāva vuttatthameva sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89). Sesaṃ paṭiccasamuppādakathābhāvato visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.570) vitthāritāvāti imināva saṅgahitaṃ.
404 关于“此有故彼有”等句当中应当说明的内容,要完全按照《胜义明灯·自说经注》里所讲的方式来理解。巴利
404.Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 1) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
407 回溯就是皈依处,意思是:针对自己过去已经走过的时光,以渴爱和邪见为动力而反向趋赴。有人问:经文中“回溯”难道不是以疑惑的形式出现的吗?确实是以疑惑的形式出现,但那种疑惑是以渴爱和邪见为根本原因的,所以注释师说“以渴爱和邪见为动力”。其中“在那里”,是指在那个依照所证悟之法而生起的如实知见之中。巴利
407.Paṭidhāvanāti paṭisaraṇaṃ, pubbe attano āgataṃ atītaṃ addhānaṃ uddissa taṇhādiṭṭhivasena paṭigamananti attho. Nanu vicikicchāvasena pāḷiyaṃ paṭidhāvanā āgatāti? Saccaṃ āgatā, sā pana taṇhādiṭṭhihetukāti ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathādhigate ñāṇadassane.
“不动性”是指稳固安住的状态,也是指不被外道言论之风吹动。“尊者”是指具足尊贵功德。“有分量”是指像石伞一样沉重。“不愿却应随顺”是说仅凭单纯的信心就去随顺,而不是以不动净信去随顺。“应作之事”是指导师应做的事。“婆罗门”是指依出身而称的婆罗门。“禁戒受持”是指道戒等各种禁戒的受持。“见之好奇”是指依执取各种不同见解,如“这是真的,这是真的”等而执取的好奇之见。“如是出离”是说:正如我给了你们这样的教诫,这些禁戒等既已如此出离,你们越过它又能执取什么呢?“自己以智慧了知”是指摆脱他人主导,仅以自己的智慧如实了知。而这样的了知,就称为自己亲证所见,所以说“自己以慧眼所见”。“自己明了”是指那些比丘各自对该义理达到了现前明了。“被引入”是指通过教诫的方便,随说法教示而被引导。“于我”是在作者意义上使用具格。“依法”是指凭理则。“此语”是指这“是现见的”等语。巴利
Niccalabhāvanti suppatiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ, titthiyavādavātehi akampiyabhāvañca. Garūti garuguṇayutto. Bhāriko pāsāṇacchattasadiso. Akāmā anuvattitabboti saddhāmattakeneva anuvattanamāha, na aveccappasādena. Kiccanti satthukiccaṃ. Brāhmaṇānanti jātimantabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Vatasamādānānīti magavatādivatasamādānāni. Diṭṭhikutūhalānīti taṃtaṃdiṭṭhiggāhavasena ‘‘idaṃ saccaṃ, idaṃ sacca’’ntiādinā gahetabbakutūhalāni. Evaṃ nissaṭṭhānīti yathā mayā tumhākaṃ ovādo dinno, evaṃ nissaṭṭhāni vatādīni taṃ atikkamitvā kiṃ gaṇheyyātha. Sayaṃ ñāṇena ñātanti paraneyyataṃ muñcitvā attano eva ñāṇena yāthāvato ñātaṃ. Evaṃbhūtañca sayaṃ paccakkhato diṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sayaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti. Sayaṃ vibhāvitanti tehi bhikkhūhi tassa atthassa paccattaṃ vibhūtabhāvaṃ āpāditaṃ. Upanītāti upakkamena dhammadesanānusārena nītā. Mayāti kattari karaṇavacanaṃ. Dhammenāti kāraṇena. Etaṃ vacananti etaṃ ‘‘sandiṭṭhiko’’tiādivacanaṃ.
408 那是这个世间的迷乱之处。“以集合”就是凭借相会。“胎”:因为它以“有身”的状态而存在,所以称为胎,也就是从羯逻蓝等阶段开始的法相续。然而,由于众生相续依止于它,所以被称为“胎”,就像说“床在高声呼喊”一样。应当知道,由于母胎是它的依止之处,所以“胎”指的就是母胎,或者也可以理解为像胎一样。正如有情的居室因为是居住之处而被称为“胎”,同样,对于那些睡在母胎中的众生来说,直到出生为止,母胎都是他们的居住之处,因此母胎也被称为“胎”。巴利
408.Taṃ sammohaṭṭhānaṃ assa lokassa. Samodhānenāti samāgamena. Gabbhati attabhāvabhāvena vattatīti gabbho, kalalādiavattho dhammapabandho, tannissitattā pana sattasantāno ‘‘gabbho’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Tannissayabhāvato mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti veditabbo, gabbho viyāti vā. Yathā hi nivāsaṭṭhānatāya sattānaṃ ovarako ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ yāva abhijāti nivāsaṭṭhānatāya mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuttoti.
“在某一夜”是指在某一个夜里。这里是把役格用于处格之义,或者表示持续不断的关联。“最初”是指最早的那一刻,也就是结生的刹那。“在胎中”是指在母胎里。“人”指的是有情众生。因为大多数众生都在夜里结生,所以特别说“夜”。“如已升起的云”是说像已经升起的云一样,或者说,他是以正面朝向死亡的方式现起的,这就是要表达的意思。“他向前去”是说:这个人从最初那一刹那开始,就一直在向前走。“他这样走着,从不回头”是说:他这样向前走,连一刹那也不停退,只是一味地走向死亡。这就是这首偈颂的含义。巴利
Yamekarattinti yassaṃ ekarattiyaṃ. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā. Paṭhamanti sabbapaṭhamaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Gabbheti mātukucchiyaṃ. Māṇavoti satto. Yebhuyyena sattā rattiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti rattiggahaṇaṃ. Abbhuṭṭhitovāti uṭṭhitaabbho viya, abhimukhabhāvena vā uṭṭhito eva maraṇassāti adhippāyo. So yātīti so māṇavo yāti paṭhamakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya gacchateva. Sa gacchaṃ na nivattatīti so evaṃ gacchanto khaṇamattampi na nivattati, aññadatthu maraṇameva upagacchatīti gāthāya attho.
这是针对时节而说的,不是指世间公认的尘垢附着的那几天。现在为了让前面已经说过的意思更清楚,就说了“据说,对于女人……”等话。那里的“在那里”,指的就是那个胎藏。“安住后”就是形成后。“破裂后”就是还没受孕的胎藏破裂了。这本来就是她的本性。“处所清净”是说:因为流出血液、没有病患,胎藏变得清净。处所既然清净,此后几天也就成了田地,因为还有一些残血存在,可以作为着床的依托。但怀孕到底是怎么可能的呢?所以说“于其时……”等话。即使在女人的相续中,也还是有精质。因此说“即使通过触摸肢节,童子也能出生”。比如王后通过触摸脐部而生下菩萨,具祥瑞女通过触摸脐部而生下曼达亚。“乾闼婆”:因为“嗅”的作用——通过显现投生处的相状来提示,所以叫“香”。以这个香为名,随着能趣向有的业力而流转的,就叫乾闼婆,也就是将投生到那里的众生。因此说“投生到那里的众生”。“被业力机器所推动”:那名为业的推动机器,能带来投生到那里;众生被它推成那样、引到那里。“以极大的生命危险”:生产的痛苦,也就是“我能活吗?我活不了吗?是我还是我儿子?”——这样产生的生命危险,广大而沉重。那个地方就是指乳房部位。以它来玩,就是玩,玩本身就是玩具。巴利
Utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na lokasamaññātarajassa lagganadivasamattaṃ. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘mātugāmassa kira yasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ gabbhāsaye. Saṇṭhahitvāti nibbattitvā. Bhijjitvāti aggahitagabbhā eva bhinnā hutvā. Ayañhi tassā sabhāvo. Vatthu suddhaṃ hotīti paggharitalohitattā anāmayattā ca gabbhāsayo suddho hoti. Suddhavatthuttā tato paraṃ katipayadivasāni khettameva hoti gabbhasaṇṭhahanassa parittassa lohitalesassa vijjamānattā. Sambhavassa pana kathaṃ sabbhāvoti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādi. Itthisantānepi sukkadhātu labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgaparāmasanenapi dārako nibbattatiyevā’’ti. Yathā pārikāya nābhiparāmasanena sāmassa bodhisattassa, diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti. Gandhabboti gandhanato uppajjanagatiyā nimittupaṭṭhāpanena sūcanato gandhoti laddhanāmena bhavagāmikammunā abbati pavattatīti gandhabbo, tattha uppajjanakasatto. Tenāha ‘‘tatrūpagasatto’’ti. Kammayantayantitoti tatrūpapattiāvahena kammasaṅkhātena pellanakayantena tathattāya pellito upanīto. Mahantena jīvitasaṃsayenāti vijāyanaparikkilesena ‘‘jīvissāmi kho, na nu kho jīvissāmi ahaṃ vā, putto vā me’’ti evaṃ pavattena jīvitasaṃsayena vipulena garutarena saṃsayena. Taṃ ṭhānanti thanappadesamāha. Kīḷanti tenāti kīḷanaṃ, kīḷanameva kīḷanakaṃ.
409 “染著”是指内心极度贪染。“嗔害”是指内心怀着嗔怒。在由头发等三十二种不净物聚集而成的身体上,以那身体的自性为所缘而现起的念,就是“身念”。“没有建立”是指没有生起,意思是没有如实观察身体。“心量狭小”是指被烦恼从四周割裂得支离破碎的心,因此说“不善心”。这些是不善法。“灭去”是指已经达到灭尽。“以渴爱而欢喜”是指以带有喜的渴爱,面向所缘而欢喜。“迎向而说”是指以渴爱,执著于种种所缘而说。“执取”是指以渴爱,仿佛进入那不为他人所共的所缘,因此说“吞没、消化之后”。在这里,“如何欢喜苦”应当理解为:欢喜苦之因的人,就称为欢喜苦。不过,注释书为了说明“凡是对苦的见与渴爱、欢喜尚未断除,在此期间就可说这人欢喜苦”,所以说“执取‘我苦、我的苦’而欢喜”。由此显示,那里是以两种执取为因的欢喜。再说“又一次”,就是再一次。以果与因的连结、因与果的连结,共有两重连结。以“入胎发生”等语句,从意义和自性两方面说明了现在这一果的简略;而另外两种则仅以自性说明,所以说“三种简略”。巴利
409.Sārajjatīti sārattacitto hoti. Byāpajjatīti byāpannacitto hoti. Kāye kesādidvattiṃsāsucisamudāye taṃsabhāvārammaṇā sati kāyasati. Anupaṭṭhapetvāti anuppādetvā, yathāsabhāvato kāyaṃ anupadhāretvāti attho. Parittacetasoti kilesehi parito khaṇḍitacitto. Tenāha ‘‘akusalacitto’’ti. Ete akusaladhammā. Nirujjhantīti nirodhaṃ pattā honti. Taṇhāvasena abhinandatīti sappītikataṇhāvasena abhimukhaṃ hutvā nandati. Abhivadatīti taṇhāvasena taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ abhinivissa vadati. Ajjhosāyāti anaññasādhāraṇaṃ viya ārammaṇaṃ taṇhāvasena anupavisitvā. Tenāha ‘‘gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Dukkhaṃ kathaṃ abhinandatīti ettha dukkhahetukaṃ abhinandanto dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yāvatā yassa dukkhe diṭṭhitaṇhā abhinandanā appahīnā, tāvatāyaṃ dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāmāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ahaṃ dukkhito mama dukkhanti gaṇhanto abhinandati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena gāhadvayahetukā tattha abhinandanāti dasseti. Puna ekavāranti punapi ekavāraṃ. Phalahetusandhihetuphalasandhivasena dvisandhī. ‘‘Gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’tiādinā atthato sarūpato ca etarahi phalasaṅkhepassa. Sarūpeneva ca itaradvayassa desitattā āha ‘‘tisaṅkhepa’’nti.
410-414 410-414. 对于止行比丘,以受为切入点,简要地说明了直到阿拉汉果的业处,所以这里说“你们要简要地受持渴爱灭尽解脱”。而世尊也按照所开示的那样宣说了“这渴爱灭尽解脱”,因此说“这……渴爱灭尽……解脱的开示”。如果是这样,为什么把开示称为解脱呢?回答说“因为开示确实……被称为解脱”。那位比丘因为那种渴爱之力,虽然陷入了常见的大缠缚,但那种渴爱对于一切佛陀的开示来说,即使伸手扶持也难以解开,所以说他“陷入了宏大渴爱网、渴爱缠缚”。“宏大渴爱网”就是巨大的渴爱纠结。“渴爱缠缚”就是渴爱的缠缚。他既然处于这种状态,就算是含摄在其中了,所以说“已进入、已包含在内”。其余内容很容易理解。巴利
410-414. Samathayānikassa bhikkhuno vedanāmukhena saṅkhepeneva yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ idha kathitanti āha ‘‘saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ dhārethā’’ti. ‘‘Imaṃ taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutti’’nti ca bhagavā yathādesitaṃ desanaṃ avocāti vuttaṃ ‘‘imaṃ…pe… vimuttidesana’’nti . Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ desanā vimuttīti āha ‘‘desanā hi…pe… vimuttīti vuttā’’ti. Yassā taṇhāya vasena sāti bhikkhu sassataggāhamahāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukko, sā sabbabuddhānaṃ desanā hatthāvalambamānepi durugghāṭiyā jātāti āha ‘‘mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukka’’nti. Mahātaṇhājāleti mahante taṇhājaṭe. Taṇhāsaṅghāṭeti taṇhāya saṅghāṭe. Tathābhūto ca tassa abbhantare kato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anupaviṭṭho antogadho’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
9. 《大马邑经》注释巴利
9. Mahāassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
415 “地方人”是指拥有地方的人,或者按种姓来说,被称为“鸯伽”的地方领主、王子们。他们的住处如果只是一个地方,为什么用复数?回答说:“因为惯用语。”文法家在这些地方,就像对待合乎规则的情形一样,要求词性和数一致(《波你尼经》1.2.51)。这里的惯用法就像“住在俱卢人那里”“住在末罗人那里”。不过,当“地方”一词用作修饰语时,和“种姓”一词一样,只用单数。所以说“在鸯伽诸地方”。有人说,assa 是石头的意思,因为那里有好看的石头,所以那个镇叫“石城”。另一些人则说,国王的一匹良马在那里被捕获,所以叫“马城”。管这些做什么呢,那只是那个镇的名字罢了。不过,因为世尊在那里并没有固定的住处,所以只说“以那里作为行乞的村落而住”。就像经中只说:“鸯伽人有一个叫石城的镇子。”这只是说明行乞的村落而已。巴利
415.Jānapadinoti janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā rājakumārā gottavasena aṅgā nāma. Tesaṃ nivāso yadi eko janapado , kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhīsaddenā’’ti. Akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya saliṅgavacanāni (pāṇini 1.2.51) icchanti. Ayamettha ruḷhī yathā ‘‘kurūsu viharati, mallesu viharatī’’ti ca. Tabbisesane pana janapadasadde jātisadde ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgesu janapade’’ti. Assā vuccanti pāsāṇāni, tāni sundarāni tattha santīti ‘‘assapura’’nti so nigamo vuttoti kecī. Apare pana ājānīyo asso rañño tattha gahaṇaṃ upagatoti ‘‘assapura’’nti vuttoti vadanti. Kiṃ tehi, nāmametaṃ tassa nigamassa. Yasmā pana tattha bhagavato nibaddhavasanaṭṭhānaṃ kiñci nāhosi, tasmā ‘‘taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā viharati’’cceva vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘assapuraṃ nāma aṅgānaṃ nigamo’’ti gocaragāmakittanameva kataṃ.
“以这样的戒”等句里,通过“戒”这一表述,说的是遮止之戒,由此显示正语、正业、正命;通过“行”这一表述,说的是奉行之戒,由此显示清净的身行与语行;通过“行道”这一表述,含摄了止、观、道、果的正行道。“有惭耻心者”这句,是说明前面所说戒与行的根本原因;“可亲者”这句,是说明清净;“大功德者”这句,是说明行道的圆满。“他们赞叹比丘僧团的功德”——这是针对那些在家信众大多热衷于称赞比丘们功德的情况而说的。不过,他们对正法和对正自觉者同样深信,所以说“佛的信奉者、法的信奉者”。因为对三宝中的任何一宝深信,由于三者不相分离,对另外两宝也必然深信。“恭敬应供”是一种借喻的说法,就像说“应当防范乌鸦保护酥油”一样,因此实际意思是“以报答资具供养”。也就是说,施主们供养资具,而自己的正行能使其产生大果报,这里所说的“恭敬应供”正是这个意思。巴利
Evarūpena sīlenātiādīsu sīlaggahaṇena vārittasīlamāha. Tena sammāvācākammantājīve dasseti. Ācāraggahaṇena cārittasīlaṃ. Tena parisuddhaṃ kāyavacīsamācāraṃ. Paṭipattiggahaṇena samathavipassanāmaggaphalasaṅgahaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ. Lajjinoti iminā yathāvuttasīlācāramūlakāraṇaṃ. Pesalāti iminā pārisuddhiṃ. Uḷāraguṇāti iminā paṭipattiyā pāripūriṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathentīti idaṃ tesaṃ upāsakānaṃ yebhuyyena bhikkhūnaṃ guṇakittanapasutatāya vuttaṃ. Te pana saddhammepi sammāsambuddhepi abhippasannā eva. Tenāha ‘‘buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā’’ti. Vatthuttaye hi ekasmiṃ abhippasannā itaradvaye abhippasannā eva tadavinābhāvato. Piṇḍapātāpacāyaneti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ yathā ‘‘kākehi sappi rakkhitabba’’nti, tasmā paccayapaṭipūjaneti vuttaṃ hoti. Paccayadāyakānañhi kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalabhāvassa karaṇaṃ idha ‘‘piṇḍapātāpacāyana’’nti adhippetaṃ.
“能作沙门”是指能成就沙门的状态、能造就沙门状态的法。这里的意思是:这些法必定是在自己的相续中生起并增长的,所以说“受持而圆满”。这里用“沙门”这个词,是就沙门的身份来说的,不是仅凭一般意义上的沙门之名,所以说“寂灭诸恶的沙门”。“能作婆罗门”在这里也应按照同样的方式理解其含义。所谓“沙门、婆罗门”的差别,只是言辞上的不同,并非意义上的不同。“沙门所应行之法”是指安住于沙门法中的人所应成就的法。也就是说,一个在下等学处所摄的沙门状态中善加安立的人,他应当成就上等学处所摄的沙门状态诸法,正是就这些法而说为“沙门所应行之法”。正因为如此,为了说明这些法也确实能带来沙门的状态,所以说“它们也是能作沙门的”。而在这里,即《大马邑经》中,依惭、愧等详细展开:以惭、愧、清净的身行口行意行、命清净、根律仪、饮食知量、警寤的修习、正念正知、禅那、明等,详细宣说了能作沙门的法,不像在《三集》中那样简略。以“果”字就已经包含了异熟果,而这里依最胜来说,应知为四种沙门果。以“功德”字则包含可爱、可意等利益。“即是彼义”就是对那个不可驳斥之句的含义说明。以“若彼”等语,是通过反面的方式来说明其义。“以此篇幅”是指以这段经文。对惭、愧等以上所说的能作沙门之法,他赞叹其功德与利益。所谓“依念处中所说的方法”,就是如《念处注》中“而且这是赞叹之语”等所说的方法。巴利
Samaṇakaraṇāti samaṇabhāvakarā, samaṇabhāvassa kārakāti attho. Te pana ekantato attano santāne uppāditā vaḍḍhitā ca hontīti āha ‘‘samādāya paripūritā’’ti. Samaṇaggahaṇañcettha samaṇavasena, na sāmaññamattenāti āha ‘‘samitapāpasamaṇa’’nti. Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti etthāpi vuttanayenevattho veditabbo. Byañjanato eva cāyaṃ bhedo, yadidaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇāti , na atthato. Samaṇenakattabbadhammāti samaṇadhamme ṭhitena sampādetabbadhammā. Yo hi heṭṭhimasikkhāsaṅkhātasamaṇabhāve suppatiṭṭhito, tena ye uparisikkhāsaṅkhātasamaṇabhāvā sampādetabbā, tesaṃ vaseneva vuttasamaṇena kattabbadhammā vuttāti. Tathā hi tesaṃ samaṇabhāvāvahataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tepi ca samaṇakaraṇā hontiyevā’’ti. Idha panāti mahāassapure. Hirottappādivasena desanā vitthāritāti hirottappa-parisuddhakāyavacīmanosamācārājīvaindriyasaṃvara-bhojanemattaññuta- jāgariyānuyogasatisampajañña-jhānavijjāvasena samaṇakaraṇadhammadesanā vitthārato desitā, na tikanipāte viya saṅkhepato. Phalaggahaṇeneva vipākaphalaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena catubbidhaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ānisaṃsaggahaṇena piyamanāpatādiudrayo. Tasseva atthoti tasseva avañcāpadasseva atthaniddeso. ‘‘Yassā hī’’tiādinā byatirekavasena atthaṃ vadati. Ettakena ṭhānenāti ettakena pāḷipadesena. Hirottappādīnaṃ upari pāḷiyaṃ vuccamānānaṃ samaṇakaraṇadhammānaṃ. Vaṇṇaṃ kathesīti guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ abhāsi. Satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayenāti ‘‘apica vaṇṇabhaṇanameta’’ntiādinā satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) vuttanayena.
416 他因为什么而惭呢?是因为某个法,或者以某个法为因,而对恶感到厌恶。这里的“因”用的是工具格,但表达的是反身的意思。也可以把“yaṃ”理解为词性变换,指的其实就是那个法。所谓“所应惭的”,是以工具格表示对象,意思是应当对它感到惭的、与身恶行等相应的状态。所谓“所应愧的”,这里也是同样的道理。“内”是指自己内在的,以自身种姓等为生起根源,这样的惭就叫“内源之惭”;“外”是指以自身之外、相对于自己而存在的外之有情为生起根源,这样的愧就叫“外源之愧”。从“自己”为增上而生起的,叫“自增上”,即把自我作为主宰而现起。以羞耻为自性而住立,即安住于厌恶恶的自性。“随承诺”者,由于具有尊重承诺的特相,对某位可尊重者说话时,以恭敬而听受,这就是承诺;与承诺共存,那承诺本身以及所含的尊重状态,都称为随承诺。以种姓等伟大性加以观察而生起的惭,也在那里以恭敬而现起,所以说它具有随承诺的特相。“以怖为自性而住立”,即安住于对恶怖畏的自性;由于具有畏惧罪恶、见罪恶为可怖的特相,所以对罪恶怖畏、将罪恶视为可怖,这样的愧就是如此自性。惭愧的内源等分别,在各地都只是依其明显状态而说,并非有时彼此决定不相离。因为羞耻不可能无怖,对恶的怖畏也不可能无羞耻。这里只是简说,详细解释应依《法集论义注》中所述方式了知。由于守护世间界限,所以叫世间守护法。“白”即清净,能令明净,或者因为白净增上生起之因,所以叫白。“混杂”即混杂行仪界限。能带来天界状态的诸法,就是天法。巴利
416.Yaṃ hirīyatīti yena dhammena hetubhūtena vā jigucchati. Karaṇe hetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yanti vā liṅgavipallāsena vutto, dhammoti attho. Hirīyitabbenāti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, hirīyitabbayuttakaṃ kāyaduccaritādinti attho. Ottappitabbenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ajjhattaṃ niyakajjhattaṃ jātiādi samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhā attato bahibhūto parasatto samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipatito āgatā attādhipateyyā, attānaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā pavattā. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitāti pāpajigucchanasabhāvaṭṭhāyinī. Sappatissavalakkhaṇattā garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patissavo, saha patissavenāti sappatissavaṃ, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāvañca yaṃ kiñci gāravaṃ. Jātiādimahattatāpaccavekkhaṇena uppajjamānā ca hirī tattha gāravavasena pavattatīti sappatissavalakkhaṇāti vuccati. Bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitanti pāpato bhāyanasabhāvaṭṭhāyī, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇattā vajjaṃ bhāyati taṃ bhayato passatīti vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvī, evaṃsabhāvaṃ ottappaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānāditā ca hirottappānaṃ tattha tattha pākaṭabhāveneva vuccati, na paresaṃ kadāci aññamaññavippayogā. Na hi lajjanaṃ nibbhayaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ hotīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.balarāsivaṇṇanā) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Lokamariyādassa pālanato lokapāladhammā nāma. Sukkāti odātā pabhassarabhāvakārakā, sukkābhijātihetutāya vā sukkā. Sambhedanti ācāramariyādāsaṅkaraṃ. Devabhāvāvahā dhammāti devadhammā.
具备白法,就是指具足上面所说的白法。寂静者,是指烦恼已经止息。善士,是指内心寂静的人。因为只有能成办自他利益的人,才确实是善士。巴利
Sukkadhammasamāhitāti yathāvuttasukkadhammasamaṅgino. Santoti vūpasantadosā. Sappurisāti santajanā. Saparahitasādhakā hi sādhavo.
整体不能离开组成部分而存在,而且整体要通过组成部分才能被指认,所以能带来教诫具足的那一部分教诫就是教诫具足。这里说的“此处”,是指阿萨普拉城。这些就是惭与愧这两种法。被称为“沙门法”,是为了表明它们是从根本上成就沙门身份的法。正因如此,才从一开始就把握它们。巴利
Avayavavinimuttassa samudāyassa abhāvato, avayavena ca samudāyassa apadisitabbato ovādūpasampadāvahaovādekadeso ovādūpasampadāti. Idhāti imasmiṃ assapure. Ete hirottappadhammā. Samaṇadhammā nāmāti dassitā mūlabhūtasamaṇabhāvakarā dhammāti katvā. Tathā hi tesaṃ ādito gahaṇaṃ.
通过证得它,才能真正毫无保留地被称为沙门,这就是圣道。把它当作“这是沙门该做的事,是沙门的修行道路”,就叫作沙门性;而由于它是圣道的果,又因为它是所缘、值得被礼敬,所以圣果和涅槃也同样是沙门的意义。“令贪灭尽”,就是贪尽,指的是圣道;“贪在这里被灭尽”,就是贪尽,指的是涅槃。至于果,则是借因来命名,也应当理解为贪尽。嗔尽、痴尽也是同样的道理。所谓“沙门性之义”,如果就沙门性本身来说,指的是圣道;如果就沙门性的果来说,指的是圣果。所以说:“把道和果合在一起,就称为沙门的意义。”这是按最殊胜的方式来解说的。因为在这里,戒等前行之道也被算作“沙门的意义”。正因如此,经文才说“当还有更上应作之事时”。“我宣说”就是反复告知的意思。巴利
Yassa adhigamena nippariyāyato samaṇā nāma honti, so ariyamaggo ‘‘samaṇassa kammaṃ paṭipadā’’ti katvā sāmaññaṃ, tassa pana phalabhāvato, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena araṇīyato phalanibbānāni sāmaññattho. Rāgaṃ khepetīti rāgakkhayo, ariyamaggo. Rāgo khīyati etthāti rāgakkhayo, nibbānaṃ. Phalaṃ pana kāraṇūpacārena rāgakkhayo daṭṭhabbo. Dosakkhayo mohakkhayoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāmaññabhūto attho sāmaññattho, maggo, sāmaññassa atthoti sāmaññattho, phalanti āha ‘‘maggampi phalampi ekato katvā sāmaññattho kathito’’ti. Tayidaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesena vuttaṃ. Sīlādipubbabhāgapaṭipadāpi hi idha ‘‘sāmaññattho’’ti gahitā. Tenevāha ‘‘sati uttarikaraṇīye’’ti. Paṭivedayāmīti punappunaṃ ñāpemi.
417 “依业道而言”的意思是:仅仅因为它属于不善业道。因此,即便是那种程度的不善业,比丘也不应当做。正因为它属于粗重恶行,比丘才应当远离它——这就是这段话的意旨。“为学处所系”是指由学处的制定所约束。在水瓶或钵中,或对乌鸦,或以手、棍、石块等,这一切都应看作只是举例说明。因为无论在哪个地方,驱赶其他众生等一切令人不悦的行为,在这里都被归入“身行不清净”之中。“明显”是指向上伸展而显著。处于这种状态时,就像在非可生处生长的婆罗双树幼芽一样,向上又向上,高高挺起,而且显明,所以说“高显、明显”。“无覆”是指无遮盖。因此说“不覆藏”,意思是不可掩藏。以清净性来说,是同一类。由于前后正确修行相续不断,中间没有孔隙缺失。由于没有身防护的杂染,所以是防护。因此说“以关闭烦恼之门”。巴利
417.Kammapathavasenevāti akusalakammapathabhāveneva, tato tādisampi akusalakammaṃ bhikkhussa kātuṃ na yuttanti duṭṭhullabhāveneva tato oramatīti adhippāyo. Sikkhāpadabaddhenāti sikkhāpadapaññāpanena. Pānīyaghaṭe vā patte vā kākānaṃ hatthaṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā leḍḍuṃ vāti sabbamidaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yattha katthaci hi ṭhitānaṃ aññesampi pāṇīnaṃ uṭṭhāpanādi sabbaṃ aniṭṭhakaraṇaṃ idha aparisuddhakāyasamācārabhāveneva saṅgahitanti. Uttānoti uddhamuddhaṃ tanotīti uttāno. Evaṃbhūto ca kenaci anuppādabhūmiyaṃ sañjātasālakalyāṇīkhandho viya uparūpari uggatuggato pākaṭo ca hotīti āha ‘‘uggato pākaṭo’’ti. Anāvaṭoti anivuto. Tenāha ‘‘asañchanno’’ti, nacchādetabboti attho. Ekasadiso visuddhabhāvena. Antarantare chiddarahito pubbenāparaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā sandhānena. Saṃvuto kāyikassa saṃvarassa anupakkilesato. Tenāha ‘‘kilesānaṃ dvāraṃ pidahanenā’’ti.
418 在这里应当这样理解:就像驱赶乌鸦等身体动作比较轻,却因为破坏清净修行而导致身行不清净;邪思惟仅仅导致意行不清净;同样,任何只是说些无助于出离的闲话,也因为破坏清净修行而导致语行不清净。但不能把它理解成以开玩笑的心态故意说谎。因为以开玩笑的心态故意说谎,已经被学处明确禁止了。巴利
418. Ettha yathā lahukataraṃ kākuṭṭhāpanādikāyakammaṃ kāyasamācārassa aparisuddhabhāvāvahaṃ sallekhavikopanato, micchāvitakkanamattañca manosamācārassa, evaṃ yaṃ kiñci aniyyānakathākathanamattaṃ vacīsamācārassa aparisuddhabhāvāvahaṃ sallekhavikopanato, na hasādhippāyena musākathananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Hasādhippāyena hi musākathanaṃ sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhittanti.
420 关于活命,也有某些情况是依业道而可以被禁止的。不过,那种极其粗重的活命违犯,在身行和语行的章节里已经说过了,所以这里没有收进来,应当这样理解。有些人说“那种情况因为不适合比丘,所以没有收进来”,这种说法是错误的。如果真是那样,那么在身行和语行的章节里也不该收进那种情况,这就会犯没有收进该收进的过失。至于“你们吃吧、喝吧”这样的问话,因为表露了问者自己想吃的意图,而且属于间接的说法,所以这就成了对严净行的破坏。巴利
420. Ājīvopi ekacco kammapathavasena vārito labbhati. So pana atioḷāriko kāyavacīsamācāravāresu vuttanayo evāti na gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘tādiso bhikkhūnaṃ ayogyato na gahito’’ti vadanti, taṃ micchā tathā sati kāyavacīsamācāravārepi tassa aggahetabbabhāvāpattito. ‘‘Khādatha pivathā’’ti pucchā attano khāditukāmatādīpanena, pariyāyakathābhāvato panesā sallekhavikopanā jātā.
422 舍弃不正当的谋生方式,以如法、公平的方式寻求生活所需,这叫“寻求知量”。接受布施时,能把握施主、所施之物和自己的限度,这叫“接受知量”。经过如理省察之后再受用,这叫“受用知量”。巴利
422. Anesanaṃ pahāya dhammena samena paccaye pariyesanto pariyesanamattaññū nāma. Dāyakassa deyyadhammassa attano ca pamāṇaññutāpaṭiggaṇhanto paṭiggahaṇamattaññū nāma. Yoniso paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanto paribhogamattaññū nāma.
423 “在一个时段”是指称为中夜的那一个时段。这样说,是指“以左侧躺卧”。并没有所谓以右侧躺卧的情况,因为右手要用来抓握身体等,不适合那样安卧。这是就男性来说的。巴利
423.Ekasmiṃkoṭṭhāseti majjhimayāmasaññite ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Vāmena passena sentī’’ti evaṃ vuttā. Dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthassa sarīraggahaṇādipayogakkhamato. Purisavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“因为火大占主导”,这句话是在显示狮子无所畏惧的特质。其他胆小的野兽进到自己窝里躺下时,总是先带着恐惧,随随便便就躺下了;而狮子因为无所畏惧,就像保持正念的比丘一样,先提起正念才躺下。所以说“两只前脚……”等等。
“卧”,是指在没有营为的状态下于此处持续,所以叫“卧”,也就是第四禅那。那么,那第四禅那是什么呢?是指入出息念的第四禅那。有些人说:世尊安住在那里面,增长观,次第证得最高的道,因此成为如来。然而,这个“立足处”并不是“卧”。另一些人则取“世尊于第四禅那之后般涅槃”这句话,说“世间第四禅那的等至是如来卧”;若如此,则成了般涅槃时的如来卧。但世尊并不多入第四禅那而住,这里所说的“第四禅那”其实是指最高的果定。在那里,正如众生的睡眠是以有分心过程而具有入睡相状的“卧”,而那也是他们多数时候与初生俱有的;同样,对于世尊,与圣者之生俱有、多数时候如此的最上果定之第四禅那,应知即是“如来卧”。“狮子卧”即最胜卧,所以说“无上卧”。巴利
Tejussadattāti iminā sīhassa abhīrukabhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhīrukā hi sesamigā attano āsayaṃ pavisitvā santāsapubbakaṃ yathā tathā sayanti, sīho pana abhīrukabhāvato satokārī bhikkhu viya satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva sayati. Tenāha ‘‘dve purimapāde’’tiādi. Seti abyāvaṭabhāvena pavattati etthāti seyyā, catutthajjhānameva seyyā. Kiṃ pana taṃ catutthajjhānanti? Ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ. Tattha hi ṭhatvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā bhagavā anukkamena aggamaggaṃ adhigato tathāgato jātoti keci, tayidaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na seyyā. Apare pana ‘‘catutthajjhānasamanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyī’’ti vuttapadaṃ gahetvā ‘‘lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpatti tathāgataseyyā’’ti vadanti, tathā sati parinibbānakālikā tathāgataseyyāti āpajjati, na ca bhagavā catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjanabahulo vihāsi, aggaphalajhānaṃ panettha ‘‘catutthajjhāna’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tattha yathā sattānaṃ niddupagamanalakkhaṇā seyyā bhavaṅgacittavāravasena hoti, tañca tesaṃ paṭhamajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ, evaṃ bhagavato ariyajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ aggaphalabhūtaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Sīhaseyyāti seṭṭhaseyyāti āha ‘‘uttamaseyyā’’ti.
426 已离债根:就是债务的根本。“那些”:指那些债务的根本。尽头:指剩余的部分。巴利
426.Vigatantānīti iṇamūlāni. Tesanti iṇamūlānaṃ. Pariyantoti avaseso.
通过制止生起而切断四种威仪。所谓“疾病”,就是折磨。所谓“痛苦者”,就是已经生起痛苦的人。“微弱之力”就是只有一点点力量。这里“量”这个字并不是像“由于舍弃少量的快乐”等语句中那样表示“少量”的意思,而是表示“力”,和力量的意思没有差别。所谓“其余的”,是指应当接着说的其余内容,比如“当他作意‘我已经从那个束缚中解脱了’时,那两者就生起”等等,是针对这些而说的。“于一切处”,就是在所说的其余一切处。“随意而去”,即“随意而行者”,此处释义未作鼻音的省略。“自己随乐受用者”应理解为“自在者”,即主人。然而他因为不属于他人,所以被称为“自己的所有者”。由于难得获得,人们渡越此处,因此称为“旷野”,所以他说“无水的长途”。巴利
Pavattinivāraṇena catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto. Ābādhatīti pīḷeti. Dukkhitoti sañjātadukkho. Appaṃ balaṃ balamattā. Appattho hi ayaṃ mattā-saddo ‘‘mattāsukhapariccāgā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 290) viya, balavattho pana mattā-saddo anatthantaro. Sesanti ‘‘tassa hi bandhanā muttomhīti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hotī’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ sandhāyāha. Sabbapadesūti vuttāvasiṭṭhesu sabbapadesu. Yenakāmaṃ yathāruci gacchatīti yenakāmaṃgamoti anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā niddeso. Bhujo attano yathāsukhaviniyogo isso icchitabbo etthāti bhujisso, sāmiko. So pana aparasantakatāya ‘‘attano santako’’ti vutto. Dullabhaāpatāya kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāroti āha ‘‘nirudakaṃ dīghamagga’’nti.
“毁坏”是指:通过吞没、不当使用等方式,让债务本金一点都不剩,他就是这样去做的。不论在哪个贪欲对象上,那个人都被那个贪欲对象所束缚:如果是男人,就是被女人束缚;如果是女人,就是被男人束缚。贪欲应当看作像债务一样,因为它带来压迫。巴利
Vināsetīti khādanadubbiniyojanādīhi yathā iṇamūlaṃ kiñci na hoti, tathā karoti. Yamhi rāgavatthumhi. So puggalo. Tena rāgavatthunā, puriso ce itthiyā, itthī ce purisena. Iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo pīḷāsamānato.
不了知,就是不知道。你们要加害,意思是你们要破坏他的安乐生活,也就是要逼迫他。嗔恨应当看作像疾病一样,因为它同样会破坏安乐。巴利
Na vindatīti na jānāti. Upaddavethāti sukhavihārassa upaddavaṃ karotha, vibādhethāti attho. Rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo sukhabhañjanasamānato.
因为以种种不同的因由和方式加以庄严,又以蕴、处、界、缘起等法理的种种善巧而变得丰富多彩,所以是“种种理趣”。
“于听法时”,就是在说法的时候。说法之所以称为“听闻”,是从“可被听闻”这个意义上说的。
戒是这样分别讲的,禅那与神通是这样分别讲的,观、道、果也是这样分别讲的——对于这样的听法,他并不知道它的开头、中间和结尾。
“于终了时”,就是结束的时候。“啊,这理由”,是指在各个地方按照所立命题而提出的论证,即据此所采纳的理由。“啊,这譬喻”,是指为了成立那个理由,从同喻和异喻两方面所确立的比喻等。
昏沉与睡眠应当看作如同牢狱,因为它障碍人从苦中出离至涅槃。巴利
Nānāvidhahetūpāyālaṅkatatāya khandhāyatanadhātupaṭiccasamuppādādidhammanītivicittatāya ca vicittanaye. Dhammassavaneti dhammakathāyaṃ. Kathā hi sotabbaṭṭhena ‘‘savana’’nti vuttā. Evamettha sīlaṃ vibhattaṃ, evaṃ jhānābhiññā, evaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalānīti neva tassa dhammassavanassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ jānāti. Uṭṭhiteti niṭṭhite. Aho kāraṇanti tattha tattha paṭiññānurūpena nikkhittasādhanavasena gahitakāraṇaṃ. Aho upamāti tasseva kāraṇassa patiṭṭhāpanavasena anvayato byatirekato ca patiṭṭhaṃ udāharaṇādi. Bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ dukkhato niyyānassa vibandhanato.
因为悔恨盖不可能离开掉举而存在,或者说掉举和悔恨有相同的作用、相同的食、相同的对治法,所以为了说明悔恨的范围,就说了“在律中不谙律者”等话。就像掉举让有情的内心无法平静,悔恨也是这样。就像掉举以亲戚寻等为食,悔恨也是这样。就像止是对治掉举的对治法,对悔恨也是这样。应当把掉举和悔恨看作像奴隶身份一样,因为它们使人失去自主。巴利
Yasmā kukkuccanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccarahitaṃ natthi, yasmā vā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ samānakiccāhārapaṭipakkhaṃ, tasmā kukkuccassa visayaṃ dassento ‘‘vinaye apakataññunā’’tiādimāha. Yathā hi uddhaccaṃ sattassa avūpasamakaraṃ, tathā kukkuccampi. Yathāpi uddhaccassa ñātivitakkādi āhāro, tathā kukkuccassapi. Yathā ca uddhaccassa samatho paṭipakkho, tathā kukkuccassapīti. Dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ aseribhāvāpādanato.
以十六事为内容的疑,已经渗透进以八事为内容的疑,所以说“在八处有疑”。“疑惑者”就是犹豫不决的人。“决意之后”就是令其信受之后。“执取”就是把握可信之事。迎面爬行是āsappanā,四处爬行是parisappanā。这两个词都是在说心不喜乐的状态。“以此不能深入安稳村之道,所以是不深入”:由于惊疑、遍疑的状态,心变得惊惧,依靠这种法的力量,这种法就称为惊惧——这是在说疑的相状,因此说“于心生起时”。“犹如旷野长路”:应当把它看作充满危险的旷野长路,因为它是导致不修行的原因。巴利
Soḷasavatthukā vicikicchā aṭṭhavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ anupaviṭṭhāti āha ‘‘aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā’’ti. Vicikicchantoti saṃsayanto. Adhimuccitvāti pattiyāyetvā. Gaṇhitunti saddheyyavatthuṃ pariggahetuṃ. Abhimukhaṃ sappanaṃ āsappanaṃ, parito sappanaṃ parisappanaṃ. Padadvayenapi cittassa anicchanākārameva vadati. Khemantagāmimaggaṃ na pariyogāhati etenāti apariyogāhanaṃ, ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitabhāvena chambhitaṃ hoti cittaṃ yassa dhammassa vasena, so dhammo chambhitattanti vicikicchanākāramāha. Tenāha ‘‘cittassa uppādayamānā’’ti. Kantāraddhānamaggo viyāti sāsaṅkakantāraddhānamaggo viya daṭṭhabbā appaṭipattihetubhāvato.
这里没有债,所以叫“无债”;无债的状态就是“无债性”,也就是不欠任何人债。“事业圆满者”指已经成就了谋生事业的经营。“障碍”是把 ra 音变成 la 音而来的,意思是阻碍、妨碍,也就是不能自在安住;它的根本原因,就叫“障碍的根本”。“修习六法之后”指生起并增长执取不净相等六种法。还应知道,“修习六法之后”在各处所说的,也是指执取慈相等六种法。“舍断”指以镇伏的方式舍断,因此说“在学处等被教导时”等等。“于他事”指对于不同类的事物,或者对于他人的境界。因为这五种欲乐对比丘来说就是他者的境界。说断除爱欲如同无债,因为它带来没有可爱事物的状态。巴利
Natthi ettha iṇanti aṇaṇo, tassa bhāvo āṇaṇyaṃ, kassaci iṇassa adhāraṇaṃ. Samiddhakammantoti nipphannajīvikappayogo. Paribundhati uparodhetīti ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā palibodho, aserivihāro, tassa mūlaṃ kāraṇanti palibodhamūlaṃ. Cha dhamme bhāvetvāti asubhanimittaggāhādike cha dhamme uppādetvā vaḍḍhetvā. Cha dhamme bhāvetvāti ca mettānimittaggāhādayo ca tattha tattha cha dhammāti vuttāti veditabbo. Pajahatīti vikkhambhanavasena pajahati. Tenāha ‘‘ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpiyamāno’’tiādi. Paravatthumhīti visabhāgavatthusmiṃ, paravisaye vā. Paravisayā hete bhikkhuno, yadidaṃ pañca kāmaguṇā. Āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānaṃ āha piyavatthuabhāvāvahato.
能防止行为失坏的学处,就是行为规范等。世尊说断除嗔害就像健康,因为它能带来身心的舒适状态。巴利
Ācāravipattipaṭibāhakāni sikkhāpadāni ācārapaṇṇattiādīni. Ārogyamiva byāpādappahānaṃ āha kāyacittānaṃ phāsubhāvāvahato.
他说,断除昏沉与睡眠,就像从束缚中解脱一样,因为它能带来心的受压制状态。巴利
Bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānaṃ āha cittassa niggahitabhāvāvahato.
就像一个享受者一样,说的是断除掉举和后悔,因为它能带来心的自在状态。巴利
Bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānaṃ āha cittassa seribhāvāvahato.
就像把草芥丢弃一样。“不计”就是不去想它。说到断除疑惑,就像到达安稳无畏之地,因为这种状态没有疑惧、没有遍疑,是正行的因。巴利
Tiṇaṃviyāti tiṇamiva katvā. Agaṇetvāti acintetvā. Khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānaṃ āha anussaṅkitāparisaṅkitabhāvena sammāpaṭipattihetubhāvato.
427 427. “被作”(kirīyati,依据《小诵注》3.5.28-29)指被投入胎藏中,所以叫“作”(kara),即“生起”;从“作”而生,就叫“作生”(karaja),意思是父母所生。有些人说,依母亲身体形成的作用而从“作”生起,所以叫“作生”。无论哪种说法,“作生身”都是指四种相续的色法。“令湿润”就是令湿透。那么这里什么是湿润的状态呢?回答说“以爱润泽”,意思是用喜的爱染来滋养。因此说“令一切处生起喜乐”。这里,由于喜所生的殊胜色法遍满整个作生身,就表明了能生起喜乐的喜乐确实在一切处生起。在“遍流”等说法中,道理也一样。在那里也应随宜理解为“周围流动、令湿润、以爱润泽,令一切处生起喜乐”等义。“充满”就是用喜乐充满这个作生身,就像用风充满皮囊一样。“周遍触碰”就是用喜乐触碰这个作生身。“一切处”是把a音变成ā音,意思是具有一切肢体,也就是具有肉等一切部分。没有一处不被触及,因为由喜乐所生的色法确实遍满一切处。能做、能连接、善于令相续、有能力警觉,这是句子的连接解释。就像用手揉合沐浴粉做成团时,容器会被挤压,所以说“令相续时破裂”。“随入”就是渗入。“遍入”就是周遍一切处而湿润。由于湿润的状态本身,其内外中间都相同,所以叫“内外中间相同”。“一切处”就是一切地方。而且不是滴漏的,因为只洒了适量之水。这里,作生身应如沐浴粉团,而初禅之乐应如将其湿润后揉合成团的适量之水。巴利
427. Kirīyati (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.28-29) gabbhāsaye khipīyatīti karo, sambhavo, karato jātoti karajo, mātāpettikasambhavoti attho. Mātuyā hi sarīrasaṇṭhāpanavasena karato jātoti karajoti apare. Ubhayathāpi karajakāyanti catusantatirūpamāha. Temetīti tintaṃ karoti. Ko panettha tintabhāvoti āha ‘‘snehetī’’ti, pītisnehena pīṇanaṃ karotīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karotī’’ti. Pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpehi sakalassa karajakāyassa pariphuṭatāya cettha taṃsamuṭṭhāpakapītisukhānaṃ sabbattha pavatti jotitā. Parisandetītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tatthāpi hi ‘‘samantato sandeti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karotī’’tiādinā yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya imaṃ karajakāyaṃ pītisukhena pūreti. Samantato phusatīti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ pītisukhena phusati. Sabbāvatoti a-kārassa ā-kāro kato, sabbāvayavavatoti atthoti āha ‘‘sabbakoṭṭhāsavato’’ti, maṃsādisabbābhāgavatoti attho. Aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti pītisukhasamuṭṭhānehi rūpehi sabbatthakameva byāpitattā. Kātuñceva yojetuñca cheko sannetuṃ paṭibaloti yojanā. Nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ parimaddanavasena piṇḍaṃ karontena hatthena bhājanaṃ nippīḷetabbaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘sannentassa bhijjatī’’ti. Anugatāti anupaviṭṭhā. Parigatāti parito samantato tintā. Tintabhāveneva samaṃ antaraṃ bāhirañca etissāti santarabāhirā. Sabbatthakamevāti sabbattheva. Na ca pagghariṇī pamāṇayuttasseva udakassa sittattā. Ettha ca nhānīyapiṇḍaṃ viya karajakāyo, taṃ temetvā sampiṇḍitapamāṇayuttaudakaṃ viya paṭhamajjhānasukhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
428 从下面涌出并上升的水:是指湖池底部以粗大的水流涌出而上升的水。在内部涌出的水:是指在湖池内部,并没有形成粗大的水流,而是从现起的水脉口涌出的水。来路:是指从河流、湖泊、山涧、池塘等处而来的路径。巴利
428.Heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanaudakoti rahadassa adhothūladhārāvasena ubbhijja uṭṭhahanaudako. Antoyeva ubbhijjanaudakoti rahadassa abbhantareyeva thūladhārā ahutvā uṭṭhitaudakasirāmukhehi ubbhijjanako. Āgamanamaggoti nadītaḷākakandarasaraādito āgamanamaggo.
429 这里因为有青莲花丛,所以叫青莲池,也就是水域。这里的判定是这样的:就像世间把红眼睛的人称为白莲眼一样。不过有些人说:红色的是红莲花,白色的是白莲花。青莲等花好比这个业所生的身体,水好比第三禅的乐——这一层意思,通过前面所说的方式类推,就已经说明了,应当这样理解。巴利
429. Uppalagacchāni ettha santīti uppalinī (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.28-29), vāri. Ayamettha vinicchayo, tathā hi loke rattakkhiko ‘‘puṇḍarīkakkho’’ti vuccati. Keci pana ‘‘rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’nti vadanti. Uppalādīni viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya tatiyajjhānasukhanti ayampi attho ‘‘purimanayenā’’ti atideseneva vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
430 “无随烦恼”的意思是说,因为不被尘垢等污染,所以是无垢的状态。即使是无垢的事物,有些也具有光明的自性,所以说“光明的意思”。“时节触”是指炎热时节的触。全身处处都是如此,业所生身被禅那之乐遍满,就像被时节所触的布一样,所以说“如布一样的业所生身”。这里的“因此”,是以“如布”等所说的内容作为理由来指回前面所说的意思,也就是说:业所生身像布一样,第四禅那的乐像时节触一样。在这里,因为舍的自性是寂静的,又是在智慧方面最殊胜的,所以舍也被包含在“乐”里面,因此第四禅那里也用“乐”来指称。经中说“以清净、遍净的心遍满而坐”,从这句话可以看出,第四禅的心和布的性质相似。为了说明由第四禅所生的色法遍满比丘的身体,所以说“禅那所生之色,犹如时节之触”。至于比丘的业所生身如同男子的身体,这个意思很明显,所以没有特别提出来;或者也可以说,因为已经有“犹如在某处……身体被触”这样的说法,这个意思已经被包含在里面了。巴利
430.Nirupakkilesaṭṭhenāti rajojallādinā anupakkiliṭṭhatāya amalīnabhāvena. Amalīnampi kiñci vatthu pabhassarasabhāvaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pabhassaraṭṭhenā’’ti. Utupharaṇanti uṇhautupharaṇaṃ. Sabbatthakameva jhānasukhena phuṭṭho karajakāyo yathā utunā phuṭṭhavatthasadisoti āha ‘‘vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo’’ti. Tasmāti ‘‘vatthaṃ viyā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati, karajakāyassa vatthasadisattā catutthajjhānasukhassa ca utupharaṇasadisattāti attho. Santasabhāvattā ñāṇuttarattā cettha upekkhāpi sukhe saṅgahitāti catutthajjhānepi sukhaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Parisuddhena pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hotī’’ti vacanato catutthajjhānacittassa vatthasadisatā vuttā. Catutthajjhānasamuṭṭhānarūpehi bhikkhuno kāyassa phuṭabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ utupharaṇaṃ viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Purisassa kāyo viya bhikkhuno karajakāyoti ayaṃ panattho pākaṭoti na gahito, gahito eva vā ‘‘yathā hi katthaci…pe… kāyo phuṭo hotī’’ti vuttattā.
431 “宿住智的譬喻”这里,是指已经说过的宿住智的譬喻。这是为了说明:一个人在当天所做的事,对普通众生来说,大多数也是清楚明白的。应当这样理解:仅仅凭提到当天经过的三个村庄,就已经暗示,对那些以大愿力而获得宿住智的人来说,他们在三有中所做过的行为,大多数也是清楚明白的。巴利
431.Pubbenivāsañāṇaupamāyanti pubbenivāsañāṇassa dassitaupamāyaṃ. Taṃdivasaṃkatakiriyāgahaṇaṃ pākatikasattassapi yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dassanatthaṃ. Taṃdivasagatagāmattayaggahaṇeneva mahābhinīhārehi aññesampi pubbenivāsañāṇalābhīnaṃ tīsu bhavesu katā kiriyā yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dīpitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
432 “面对面之门”是指彼此相对而开的门。“来来往往行走”是指随着各自该做的事,从这里到那里来回走动。至于“从此家……中略……以进入的方式”等语,这是为了显示死生智的认知范围而说的。“站在两家之间”是指站在两家大门正对面的地方,也就是中间街道的正中央。因为如果一家门朝东,另一家门朝西,有个眼睛好的人站在两家之间的街巷中,面朝南或朝北,那么进出的人对他来说自然一清二楚;同样,具备天眼智的人,对众生的死与投生也能看得清清楚楚。不过应当知道:就像那个人是在不同刹那看见有人进去、又在不同刹那看见有人出来一样,这位天眼智者也一样,是在不同刹那看见众生死亡、又在不同刹那看见众生投生。应把“智的清晰显现”这一层意思带进来理解。这里的“他的”,指的就是这个智。巴利
432.Sammukhadvārāti aññamaññassa abhimukhadvārā. Aparāparaṃ sañcaranteti taṃtaṃkiccavasena ito cito ca sañcarante. Ito pana gehā…pe… pavisanavasenapīti idaṃ cutūpapātañāṇassa visayadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Dvinnaṃ gehānaṃ antare ṭhatvāti dvinnaṃ gehadvārānaṃ sammukhaṭṭhānabhūte antaravīthiyaṃ vemajjhe ṭhatvā. Tesu hi ekassa ce pācīnamukhadvāraṃ itarassa pacchimamukhaṃ, tassa sammukhaṃ ubhinnaṃ antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitassa dakkhiṇāmukhassa, uttarāmukhassa vā cakkhumato purisassa tattha pavisanakanikkhamanakapurisā yathā sukheneva pākaṭā honti, evaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇasamaṅgino cavanakaupapajjanakapurisā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa aññeneva khaṇena pavisantassa dassanaṃ, aññena nikkhamantassa dassanaṃ, evaṃ imassapi aññeneva khaṇena cavamānassa dassanaṃ, aññena upapajjamānassa dassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ñāṇassa pākaṭāti ānetvā sambandho. Tassāti ñāṇassa.
433 山峰顶部大多数是收缩、紧凑的,所以这里把山顶叫做“山的收缩”;或者,属于山所涵盖的区域也可以叫“山的收缩”。“不浊”就是没有浑浊。它之所以不浑浊,是因为没有烂泥,所以说“无泥”。对于牛来说,无论是站着的还是卧着的。所谓“存在的”,就是“可得到的”。其他的,无论是站着、卧着还是走着,都按照同行共处的道理来说。只是站着,从来不行走。所谓“两类”,是指贝类和贝壳、鱼群,这两类在文字上说是“站着的”,但含义中也包含“行走的”。何必用这种相伴共处的关系来解释呢?其实这里应当理解为根据实际情况来取舍。也就是说,对于碎石和砂砾,用“站着”来搭配解说;对于贝类、贝壳和鱼群,则应当用“或站或行”来搭配解说。巴利
433. Pabbatasikharaṃ yebhuyyena saṃkhittaṃ saṅkucitaṃ hotīti idha pabbatamatthakaṃ ‘‘pabbatasaṅkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ, pabbatapariyāpanno vā padeso pabbatasaṅkhepo. Anāviloti akālusso. Sā cassa anāvilatā kaddamābhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘nikkaddamo’’ti. Ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi gāvīsu. Vijjamānāsūti labbhamānāsu. Itarā ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi carantīti vuccanti sahacaraṇañāyena. Tiṭṭhantameva, na kadācipi carantaṃ. Dvayanti sippisammukaṃ macchagumbanti imaṃ ubhayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ, carantampīti adhippāyo. Kiṃ vā imāya sahacariyāya, yathālābhaggahaṇaṃ panettha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkharakathalassa hi vasena ‘‘tiṭṭhanta’’nti, sippisambukassa macchagumbassa ca vasena ‘‘tiṭṭhantampi, carantampī’’ti yojanā kātabbā.
434 所谓“比丘”,就是烦恼已被破除的人。从究竟意义上说,他才真正配得上“沙门”这个名称。在这里,通过圣道彻底平息了一切恶法的人,就是沙门。所以说“因为平息了恶法”。从最殊胜的意义上说,正自觉者被称为“梵”;因为从圣道而来,所以称为梵,这里的梵指的就是圣道。以不迷乱、亲证通达的方式了知了圣道,所以称为“婆罗门”。正是因为他具备了圣道,他的种种恶法才得以远离。所以说“因为远离了恶法,所以是婆罗门”。用八支圣道之水沐浴过、烦恼已洗净的人,就是“沐浴者”。因为已去,即依断除现观而通达。所以说“因为已了知”。因为已离,即依正断舍而彻底从相续中灭尽。所以说“因为已舍断”,意思是依界限而损害烦恼,依圣道部分或彻底地断除一切烦恼。所以说“因为已害”。因为远,即由于善断而远离。所以说“因为已远离”。两者在两种场合都应配合:因为烦恼已远、已害、已远离,所以是圣者;同样地,所以是阿拉汉。这里凡在义理上没有分别说明的,因为意义浅显,应当很容易理解。巴利
434.Bhikkhūti bhinnakilesoti bhikkhu. So hi paramatthato samaṇotināmako. Tattha ariyamaggena sabbaso pāpānaṃ samitāvīti samaṇo. Tenāha ‘‘samitapāpattā’’ti. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmā vuccati sammāsambuddho, tato āgatoti brahmā, ariyamaggo, taṃ asammohapaṭivedhavasena aññāsīti brāhmaṇo. Taṃsamaṅgitāya hissa pāpānaṃ bāhitabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo’’ti. Aṭṭhaṅgikena ariyamaggajalena nhātavā niddhotakilesoti nhātako. Gatattāti pahānābhisamayavasena paṭividdhattā. Tenāha ‘‘viditattā’’ti. Nissutattāti samucchedappahānavasena santānato sabbaso nihatattā. Tenāha ‘‘apahatattā’’ti, mariyādavasena kilesānaṃ hiṃsitattā ariyamaggehi odhiso sabbaso kilesānaṃ samucchinnattāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘hatattā’’ti. Ārakattāti suppahīnatāya vippakaṭṭhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘dūrībhūtattā’’ti. Ubhayampi ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ – kilesānaṃ ārakattā hatattā dūrībhūtattā ca ariyo, tathā arahanti. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ uttānatthattā suviññeyyameva.
10. 《小马邑经》的注释巴利
10. Cūḷaassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
435 “和前面那部经一样”的意思是:就像前一部经《大马城经》(中部注释书2.415)里所说的那样——“看到马城居民对比丘僧团怀着恭敬、尊重和礼敬,为了劝勉比丘们对施食也保持恭敬,所以说了这部经。”这里说的和那里完全一样。“适合沙门”:是适合沙门、与沙门身份相称的意思。“随顺沙门的行道”:是随顺那被称为沙门性的圣道、与之相应的修行方式。巴利
435.Purimasadisamevāti ‘‘assapuravāsīnaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe gāravabahumānaṃ nipaccakārañca disvā bhikkhū piṇḍapātāpacāyane niyojento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsī’’ti purimasutte mahāassapure (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.415) vuttasadisameva. Samaṇānaṃ anucchavikāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvassa anucchavikā patirūpā. Samaṇānaṃ anulomappaṭipadāti samaṇānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa anukūlappaṭipadā.
436 这些法,是指经文中说到的贪欲、嗔恨等恶法。正在生起,是指就在生起的那一刻,更不用说已经在心相续中反复修习的了。有污垢,是指有垢染、被污染。被垢所执取,是指被垢染抓住、垢染已经生起。沙门的污垢,是指沙门身份上的污垢。被败坏,是指衰败、毁灭。沙门的过失,是指对沙门身份的败坏。粗劣,是指没有实质。没有光泽,是指没有力量。从利益和快乐脱离,就是恶趣,也就是地狱等地方;这些法以那里的果报为目标,或者以那里为用途,因此称为恶趣的。处所是贪欲等。因此说“在恶趣”等。以因为性,对属于恶趣的受有益,即恶趣所受。因此说“恶趣中异熟受的诸缘”。利铁,是指像利刃一样的实质铁。以铁,是指以铁屑。据说鹤鸟的腹中停留的任何东西都会变得坚硬锐利。因此它们的粪便能消融骨头和石头。因此说“喂鹤鸟”。那铁粉据说用火也难烧尽,但依靠药力则能轻易烧尽。因此说“善巧的铁匠们得到许多手工作业的报酬后制作”等。变得极锐利,能像切断软木棍一样轻易切断某种铁制束缚。由兔皮和猫皮等结合而成,故称为套,即武器装备,所以说“套,是指鞘”。覆盖,是指周遍覆盖、遮蔽。从一切处缠绕,是指完全覆盖。巴利
436.Ete dhammāti ete pāḷiyaṃ āgatā abhijjhābyāpādādayo pāpadhammā. Uppajjamānāti uppajjamānā eva, pageva santāne bhāvitā. Malineti malavante kiliṭṭhe. Malaggahiteti gahitamale sañjātamale. Samaṇamalāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvassa malā. Dussantīti vipajjanti vinassanti. Samaṇadosāti samaṇānaṃ samaṇabhāvadūsanā. Kasaṭeti asāre. Nirojeti nitteje. Ayato sukhato apetāti apāyā, nirayādayo, taṃ phalaṃ arahanti, taṃ payojanaṃ vā etesanti āpāyikā. Ṭhānāni abhijjhādayo. Tenāha ‘‘apāye’’tiādi. Kāraṇabhāvena duggatipariyāpannāya vedanāya hitānīti duggativedaniyāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘duggatiyaṃ vipākavedanāya paccayāna’’nti. Tikhiṇaṃ ayanti vekantakasadisaṃ sāraayaṃ. Ayenāti ayoghaṃsakena. Koñcasakuṇānaṃ kira kucchiyaṃ nivutthaṃ yaṃ kiñci kharaṃ tikhiṇañca hoti. Tathā hi tesaṃ vaccaṃ aṭṭhimpi pāsāṇampi vilīyāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘koñcasakuṇe khādāpentī’’ti. Taṃ kira ayacuṇṇaṃ aggināpi kicchena dayhati, bhesajjabalena pana sukhena dayheyya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘susikkhitā ca naṃ ayakārā bahuhatthakammamūlaṃ labhitvā karontī’’tiādi. Atitikhiṇaṃ hoti, aññataraṃ ayobandhanaṃ pheggudaṇḍaṃ viya sukheneva chindanti. Sasabiḷāracammehi saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭīti vuccati āvudhaparicchadoti āha ‘‘saṅghāṭiyāti kosiyā’’ti. Pariyonaddhanti parito onaddhaṃ chāditaṃ. Samantato veṭhitanti sabbaso pihitaṃ.
437 “尘”是指从外面沾上的尘土。“垢”是指身体上自然产生的汗垢等污秽。尘和垢因为持戒而不去除,他具有这个,所以叫“持尘垢者”,说的就是这种人。因此说“持尘垢者”。“入水”等句的意思,在《大狮子吼经》注释里已经讲过了。说到“所有这一切”等处,意思是这一切都是就外道的修行方式而说的。因此,“穿桑喀帝者”是指穿着由碎布片缝合成、被称为“桑喀帝”的衣服的人。经文中确实只说“穿桑喀帝者”,而没有说“比丘”。因此说“在这个(教法)中”等。那么,为什么世尊在这里只破除了穿桑喀帝等头陀支誓戒呢?这是为了显示方法,因为其他如五种热恼等头陀支也因破除这些而同样被了知。另有一些人则说:当世尊说“诸比丘,我不因为穿桑喀帝者仅仅穿着桑喀帝就称其为沙门法”时,坐在那里的一些执持外道见解的人心想:“这是在说裸形外道吗?”另一些人心想:“这是在说持尘垢者吗?”世尊正是根据这些人心中的意向,在这里破除了这些头陀支誓戒。“穿桑喀帝者”,是指以内衣和外衣的方式穿着桑喀帝衣的人。因此说“桑喀帝衣”等。他们以自己的喜好,让朋友等人做成桑喀帝衣,后来到了被认可的时候,就劝他们受持穿桑喀帝者之戒。巴利
437.Rajoti āgantukarajo. Jallanti sarīre uṭṭhānakaloṇādimalaṃ. Rajojallañca vatasamādānavasena anapanītaṃ etassa atthīti rajojalliko, tassa. Tenāha ‘‘rajojalladhārino’’ti. Udakaṃ orohantassātiādīnamattho mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyeva. Sabbametantiādīsu sabbasopi vatasamādānavasenāti adhippāyo. Yasmā sabbametaṃ bāhirasamayavaseneva kathitaṃ, tasmā saṅghāṭikassāti pilotikakhaṇḍehi saṅghaṭitattā ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti laddhanāmavatthadhārinoti attho. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṭikassa’’icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘bhikkhuno’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘imasmiṃ hī’’tiādi. Kasmā panettha bhagavatā saṅghāṭikattādīniyeva vatasamādānāni paṭikkhittānīti? Nayadassanametaṃ aññesampi pañcātapamūgavatādīnaṃ tappaṭikkhepeneva pasiddhito. Apare pana bhaṇanti – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, saṅghāṭikassa saṅghāṭidhāraṇamattena sāmaññaṃ vadāmī’’ti vutte tattha nisinno koci titthantaraladdhiko acelakattaṃ nu kho kathanti cintesi, apare rajojallakattaṃ nu kho kathanti, evaṃ taṃ taṃ cintentānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā imāneva vatasamādānāni idha paṭikkhipīti. Saṅghāṭikanti nivāsanapārupanavasena saṅghāṭivantaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṅghāṭikaṃ vattha’’ntiādi. Attano ruciyā mittādayo saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyuṃ, pacchā viññutaṃ pattakāle saṅghāṭikatte samādapeyyuṃ.
438 他看见自己清净,因为贪欲等烦恼没有现行。但不能因此就说他已经是靠圣道断尽烦恼而清净的。欢悦指的是微细的喜悦。当他看见自己因为正确修行而镇伏了烦恼、心得清净时,就生起欢悦,那是一种满意的状态。所以说满意的状态。喜指的是能带来轻安的强盛喜悦。名身轻安这句话,说的是心和心所两者的轻安。感受就是体验、领受。现在,因为他的心已经通过远离五盖而得到清净,所以说如同达到安止定一般。从一个地方生起、又到达另一个地方,仅凭这一点作为譬喻,以高低层次的相似性,前面已经以对治不善法的方式结束了说法,所以说随顺连贯。在《大狮子吼经》中,道被比喻为莲池,经文从舍利弗,譬如有一座莲池开始,在譬喻与法义对应时说:这位行者这样行道,这样行持,登上了那样的道,以至于诸漏灭尽。就像从东方等地来的人,到了那座莲池边,身体变得清净,热恼消失;同样,从刹帝利等家族出身的人,来到如来所宣说的法与律的教法,名身变得清净,烦恼的热恼消失。因此,由于一切烦恼都已止息,他就是究竟意义上的沙门。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
438.Attānaṃ visujjhantaṃ passati abhijjhādīnaṃ samudācārābhāvato. Maggena asamucchinnattā visuddhoti pana na vattabbo. Pāmojjanti taruṇapītimāha. Tassa hi attano sammāpaṭipattiyā kilesānaṃ vikkhambhitattā cittassa visuddhataṃ passantassa pāmojjaṃ jāyati, taṃ tuṭṭhākāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tuṭṭhākāro’’ti. Pītīti passaddhiāvahā balavapīti. Nāmakāyo passambhatīti iminā ubhayampi passaddhiṃ vadati. Vediyatīti anubhavati vindati. Idāni tena nīvaraṇehi cittassa visodhanattaṃ laddhanti āha ‘‘appanāppattaṃ viya hotī’’ti. Aññattha uṭṭhitā aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatāti ettakena upamābhāvena uccanīcatāsāmaññena heṭṭhā asaddhammānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena desanāya pariyosāpitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhinā’’ti. Mahāsīhanādasutte maggo pokkharaṇiyā upamito ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, pokkharaṇī’’tiādiṃ (ma. ni. 1.154) ārabhitvā upamāsaṃsandane ‘‘tathāyaṃ puggalo paṭipanno, tathā ca iriyati, tañca maggaṃ samāruḷho, yathā āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.154) vuttattā. Yathā hi puratthimādidisāhi āgatā purisā taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ āgamma visuddharūpakāyā vigatapariḷāhā ca honti, evaṃ khattiyādikulato āgatā tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ sāsanaṃ āgamma visuddhanāmakāyā vigatakilesapariḷāhā ca honti. Tasmā sabbakilesānaṃ samitattā paramatthasamaṇo hotīti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.